Panasonic Home Security System AW HE130K User Manual

Operating Instruction  
HD Integrated Camera  
AW-HE130W  
Model No.  
AW-HE130K  
Model No.  
Before operating this product, please read the instructions carefully and save this manual for future use.  
zAbout the instruction manuals  
Operating Instructions (this document):  
This manual describes how to operate and configure settings for the unit.  
Installation Instructions:  
This manual includes information on installation and system configurations for the unit.  
Be sure to read this before installing the unit to ensure proper installation.  
ENGLISH  
VQT5L27  
XX1014KT0 -PS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Read this first! (For AW HE130WP, AW HE130KP) (continued)  
FCC NOTICE (USA)  
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules.  
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:  
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may  
cause undesired operation.  
FCC Note:  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.  
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial  
environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy, and if not installed and used in accordance with the  
instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause  
harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.  
Warning:  
To assure continued FCC emission limit compliance, the user must use only shielded interface cables when connecting to external units. If  
DVI-D port is to be used it must be connected to PC by compatible interface cable with two ferrite cores. Also, any unauthorized changes or  
modifications to this equipment could void the user’s authority to operate it.  
NOTIFICATION (Canada)  
This class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.  
indicates safety information.  
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS  
1) Read these instructions.  
2) Keep these instructions.  
3) Heed all warnings.  
4) Follow all instructions.  
5) Do not use this apparatus near water.  
6) Clean only with dry cloth.  
7) Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.  
8) Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat.  
9) Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other. A  
grounding-type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug  
does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet.  
10) Protect the power cord form being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the  
apparatus.  
11) Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer.  
12) Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used,  
use caution when moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over.  
13) Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time.  
14) Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as  
power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been  
exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Read this first! (For AW HE130WE, AW HE130KE)  
WARNING:  
CAUTION:  
This equipment must be earthed.  
The mains plug of the power supply cord shall remain readily  
operable.  
To ensure safe operation, the three-pin plug must be inserted  
only into a standard three-pin power point which is effectively  
earthed through the normal household wiring.  
The AC receptacle (mains socket outlet) shall be installed near  
the equipment and shall be easily accessible. To completely  
disconnect this equipment from the AC mains, disconnect the  
power cord plug from the AC receptacle.  
Extension cords used with the equipment must have three  
cores and be correctly wired to provide connection to the earth.  
Wrongly wired extension cords are a major cause of fatalities.  
The fact that the equipment operates satisfactorily does not  
imply that the power point is earthed or that the installation is  
completely safe. For your safety, if you are in any doubt about  
the effective earthing of the power point, please consult a  
qualified electrician.  
CAUTION:  
In order to maintain adequate ventilation, do not install or place  
this unit in a bookcase, built-in cabinet or any other confined  
space. To prevent risk of electric shock or fire hazard due to  
overheating, ensure that curtains and any other materials do not  
obstruct the ventilation.  
WARNING:  
• To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock, do not expose this  
equipment to rain or moisture.  
• To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock, keep this equipment  
away from all liquids. Use and store only in locations which are  
not exposed to the risk of dripping or splashing liquids, and do  
not place any liquid containers on top of the equipment.  
CAUTION:  
To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock and annoying  
interference, use the recommended accessories only.  
CAUTION:  
Check the installation at least once a year.  
An improper installation could cause the unit to fall off resulting  
in personal injury.  
CAUTION:  
Do not remove panel covers by unscrewing.  
To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not remove the covers.  
No user serviceable parts inside.  
Refer servicing to qualified service personnel.  
CAUTION:  
Do not pick up and move the unit while the tripod is attached.  
The fitting may break under the weight of the tripod, which may  
result in injury.  
indicates safety information.  
EEE Yönetmeliğine Uygundur.  
EEE Complies with Directive of Turkey.  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Read this first! (For AW HE130WE, AW HE130KE) (continued)  
EMC NOTICE FOR THE PURCHASER/USER OF THE APPARATUS  
1. Applicable standards and operating environment  
The apparatus is compliant with:  
• standards EN55103-1 and EN55103-2, and  
• electromagnetic environments E4.  
In a residential, commercial, light industrial and urban outdoors environment, this product may cause radio interference.  
2. Pre-requisite conditions to achieving compliance with the above standards  
<1> Peripheral equipment to be connected to the apparatus and special connecting cables  
• The purchaser/user is urged to use only equipment which has been recommended by us as peripheral equipment to be connected to the  
apparatus.  
• The purchaser/user is urged to use only the connecting cables described below.  
<2> For the connecting cables, use shielded cables which suit the intended purpose of the apparatus.  
• Video signal connecting cables  
Use double shielded coaxial cables, which are designed for 75-ohm type high-frequency applications, for SDI (Serial Digital Interface).  
Coaxial cables, which are designed for 75-ohm type high-frequency applications, are recommended for analog video signals.  
• Audio signal connecting cables  
If your apparatus supports AES/EBU serial digital audio signals, use cables designed for AES/EBU.  
Use shielded cables, which provide quality performance for high-frequency transmission applications, for analog audio signals.  
• Other connecting cables (IEEE1394, USB)  
Use double shielded cables, which provide quality performance for high-frequency applications, as connecting cables.  
• When connecting to the DVI signal terminal, use a cable with a ferrite core.  
• If your apparatus is supplied with ferrite core(s), they must be attached on cable(s) following instructions in this manual.  
3. Performance level  
The performance level of the apparatus is equivalent to or better than the performance level required by these standards.  
However, the apparatus may be adversely affected by interference if it is being used in an EMC environment, such as an area where strong  
electromagnetic fields are generated (by the presence of signal transmission towers, cellular phones, etc.). In order to minimize the adverse  
effects of the interference on the apparatus in cases like this, it is recommended that the following steps be taken with the apparatus being  
affected and with its operating environment:  
1. Place the apparatus at a distance from the source of the interference.  
2. Change the direction of the apparatus.  
3. Change the connection method used for the apparatus.  
4. Connect the apparatus to another power outlet where the power is not shared by any other appliances.  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Read this first! (For AW HE130WE, AW HE130KE) (continued)  
Caution for AC Mains Lead  
FOR YOUR SAFETY PLEASE READ THE FOLLOWING TEXT CAREFULLY.  
This product is equipped with 2 types of AC mains cable. One is for continental Europe, etc. and the other one is only for U.K.  
Appropriate mains cable must be used in each local area, since the other type of mains cable is not suitable.  
FOR CONTINENTAL EUROPE, ETC.  
Not to be used in the U.K.  
FOR U.K. ONLY  
If the plug supplied is not suitable for your socket outlet, it should be  
cut off and appropriate one fitted.  
How to replace the fuse  
1. Open the fuse compartment with a screwdriver.  
FOR U.K. ONLY  
This appliance is supplied with a moulded three pin mains plug for  
your safety and convenience.  
A 13 amp fuse is fitted in this plug.  
Should the fuse need to be replaced please ensure that the  
replacement fuse has a rating of 13 amps and that it is approved by  
ASTA or BSI to BS1362.  
Check for the ASTA mark  
fuse.  
or the BSI mark  
on the body of the  
If the plug contains a removable fuse cover you must ensure that it  
is refitted when the fuse is replaced.  
2. Replace the fuse.  
If you lose the fuse cover the plug must not be used  
until a replacement cover is obtained.  
A replacement fuse cover can be purchased from your local  
Panasonic Dealer.  
Fuse  
indicates safety information.  
Manufactured by: Panasonic Corporation, Osaka, Japan  
Importer’s name and address of pursuant to EU rules:  
Panasonic Marketing Europe GmbH  
Panasonic Testing Centre  
Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Germany  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Read this first! (For AW HE130WE, AW HE130KE) (continued)  
Note on grounding  
• Ground the unit via the <SIGNAL GND> ground connector.  
to ground  
connector on wall  
outlet, ground  
bar, etc.  
Ground connector  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Read this first! (For AW HE130WP, AW HE130KP) ............................ 2  
Matrix 4/5 screen ............................................................................... 53  
Matrix 5/5 screen ............................................................................... 53  
System screen ................................................................................... 54  
Genlock screen.................................................................................. 54  
Output screen .................................................................................... 55  
Other 1/4 screen ................................................................................ 57  
Other 2/4 screen ................................................................................ 57  
Other 3/4 screen ................................................................................ 58  
Other 4/4 screen ................................................................................ 58  
Maintenance screen........................................................................... 59  
Firmware VER 1/2 screen.................................................................. 59  
Firmware VER 2/2 screen.................................................................. 59  
IP Network screen.............................................................................. 60  
Read this first! (For AW HE130WE, AW HE130KE) ............................ 4  
Note on grounding ............................................................................... 7  
Before use............................................................................................ 10  
Overview............................................................................................ 10  
Computer requirements ..................................................................... 10  
Disclaimer of warranty ....................................................................... 11  
Network security ................................................................................ 11  
Features................................................................................................ 12  
Controller supported........................................................................... 13  
Accessories ......................................................................................... 14  
Optional accessories .......................................................................... 14  
Operating precautions........................................................................ 15  
Wireless remote control (optional accessory).................................. 17  
Camera menu items ............................................................................ 61  
Displaying the web screen ................................................................. 64  
Displaying the web screen using a personal computer...................... 64  
Switching between the Live screen and Setup screen ...................... 65  
Parts and their functions.................................................................... 18  
Camera unit ....................................................................................... 18  
Wireless remote control (not supplied) .............................................. 21  
Web screen operations....................................................................... 66  
Live screen: Single display mode ...................................................... 66  
Live screen: Multi display mode......................................................... 70  
Setting the remote control IDs ........................................................... 23  
Web screen configurations ................................................................ 71  
Logging into the Setup screen ........................................................... 71  
Web setup screen (Setup) ................................................................. 71  
Basic screen ...................................................................................... 72  
Image screen ..................................................................................... 73  
Multi-Screen setup screen ................................................................. 86  
User mng. screen............................................................................... 87  
Network setup screen ........................................................................ 89  
Maintenance screen......................................................................... 101  
Network settings.................................................................................. 24  
Installing the software ........................................................................ 24  
Use the Easy IP Setup Software to establish the unit’s settings........ 24  
Basic shooting operations ................................................................. 25  
How to turn the power on and off ...................................................... 25  
Turning the power on......................................................................... 25  
Turning the power off......................................................................... 25  
Selecting the units............................................................................... 26  
Displaying the web screen using a mobile terminal...................... 105  
System log displays.......................................................................... 109  
Limiters............................................................................................... 110  
Selecting the shooting modes (scene files)...................................... 27  
Types of shooting modes................................................................... 27  
How to select the shooting mode....................................................... 27  
Shooting............................................................................................... 28  
Setting/releasing the limiters ........................................................... 111  
Setting/releasing the limiters............................................................ 111  
Setting the limiters ........................................................................... 111  
Releasing the limiters....................................................................... 111  
Resetting the limiters ....................................................................... 111  
What to do when encountering problems in the basic shooting  
operations........................................................................................ 29  
More advanced operations................................................................. 29  
Manual shooting.................................................................................. 30  
Manually adjusting the focus.............................................................. 30  
Manually adjusting the iris.................................................................. 30  
Manually adjusting the shutter speed ................................................ 30  
Manually adjusting the gain ............................................................... 30  
Safe mode .......................................................................................... 112  
Concerning the safe mode............................................................... 112  
Detection of equipment trouble........................................................ 112  
Notes on for using Windows 7......................................................... 113  
Computer requirements ................................................................... 113  
Precautions when using Windows 7 ................................................ 113  
Preset memories.................................................................................. 31  
White balance adjustment.................................................................. 32  
Automatic adjustment (AWB: AWB A or AWB B) .............................. 32  
Auto tracking white adjustment (ATW)............................................... 33  
3200K and 5600K presets ................................................................. 33  
VAR.................................................................................................... 33  
Troubleshooting ................................................................................ 114  
Specifications.................................................................................... 122  
Index................................................................................................... 124  
Black balance adjustment .................................................................. 34  
Automatic adjustment ........................................................................ 34  
Black level (master pedestal) adjustment......................................... 35  
Genlock adjustment............................................................................ 36  
Horizontal phase adjustment ............................................................. 36  
Basic operations.................................................................................. 37  
When performing the operations using the wireless remote control... 39  
Operations on the AW-RP50 Remote Camera Controller ................. 40  
Operations on the AW-RP120 Remote Camera Controller ............... 42  
Operations on the AK-HRP200 Remote Operation Panel ................. 44  
Camera menu items ............................................................................ 47  
Setting the camera menu items ......................................................... 47  
Top Menu screen............................................................................... 47  
Camera screen .................................................................................. 48  
Brightness 1/2 screen ........................................................................ 48  
Brightness 2/2 screen ........................................................................ 49  
Picture 1/3 screen.............................................................................. 50  
Picture 2/3 screen.............................................................................. 50  
Picture 3/3 screen.............................................................................. 51  
Matrix 1/5 screen ............................................................................... 51  
Matrix 2/5 screen ............................................................................... 52  
Matrix 3/5 screen ............................................................................... 52  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Trademarks and registered trademarks  
• Microsoft®, Windows®, Windows® 7, Windows® 8, Windows® 8.1,  
Internet Explorer®, ActiveX® and DirectX® are either registered  
trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United  
States and other countries.  
Abbreviations  
The following abbreviations are used in this manual.  
• Microsoft® Windows® 7 Professional SP1 32/64-bit is abbreviated  
to “Windows 7”.  
• Microsoft® Windows® 8 Pro 32/64-bit is abbreviated to “Windows  
• Apple, Mac, Mac OS, iPhone, iPod Touch, iPad, and Safari are  
registered trademarks of Apple Inc., in the United States and other  
countries.  
8”.  
• Microsoft® Windows® 8.1 Pro 32/64-bit is abbreviated to “Windows  
8.1”.  
• Android™ is a trademark of Google Inc.  
• Windows® Internet Explorer® 8.0, Windows® Internet Explorer®  
9.0, Windows® Internet Explorer® 10.0 and Windows® Internet  
Explorer® 11.0 are abbreviated to “Internet Explorer”.  
• Intel® and Intel® CoreTM are trademarks or registered trademarks  
of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries.  
• Adobe® and Reader® are either registered trademarks or  
trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States  
and/or other countries.  
For the purposes of this manual, the model numbers of the units are  
given as listed in the table below.  
• HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are  
the trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing, LLC  
in the United States and other countries.  
• Other names of companies and products contained in these  
Operating Instructions may be trademarks or registered  
trademarks of their respective owners.  
Model number  
Model number of unit  
given in manual  
AW-HE130W  
AW-HE130  
AW-HE130K  
AW-HS50N  
AW-PS550N  
AW-RP50N  
AW-HS50  
AW-PS550  
AW-RP50  
About copyright and licence  
Distributing, copying, disassembling, reverse compiling, reverse  
engineering, and also exporting in violation of export laws of the  
software provided with this unit are expressly prohibited.  
AW-RP120G  
AK-HRP200G  
AW-RP120  
AK-HRP200  
Illustrations and screen displays featured  
in the manual  
• What is shown in the manual’s illustrations and screen displays  
may differ from how it is actually appears.  
• Functions which can be used by Windows only are indicated using  
the  
mark.  
• The screenshots are used in accordance with the guidelines of  
Microsoft Corporation.  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before use  
Overview  
Computer requirements  
• This unit is a full HD camera with an integrated pan-tilt head that  
features the newly developed 1/2.86-type full HD 3MOS sensor and  
digital signal processor (DSP).  
CPU  
Intel® Core™ 2 DUO 2.4 GHz or more  
recommended  
Memory  
For Windows:  
1 GB or more  
(2 GB or more for 64-bit editions of Microsoft®  
Windows® 8.1, Microsoft® Windows® 8, and  
Microsoft® Windows® 7)  
For Mac:  
• In addition to its optical 20× zoom lens, the unit is equipped with  
10× digital zoom to achieve vibrant high-quality images that have a  
horizontal resolution of 1000 lines.  
With its high sensitivity and built-in image-shake correction and night-  
mode functions, the unit can record in a wide range of environments.  
2 GB or more  
• When a controller is connected, camera operations can be performed  
smoothly via IP control or serial control.  
Network function  
10BASE-T or 100BASE-TX port × 1  
Image display  
Resolution: 1024 × 768 pixels or more  
Color generation: True Color 24-bit or more  
• The unit features a night mode that exposes subjects to infrared rays,  
making it possible to shoot even under low-light conditions.  
Supported operating For Windows:  
• When the unit is connected to a computer via an IP network, it can be  
operated via a web browser.  
1
systems and  
Microsoft® Windows® 8.1 Pro 64-bit / 32-bit  
*
web browsers  
Windows® Internet Explorer® 11.0  
1
Microsoft® Windows® 8 Pro 64-bit / 32-bit  
• Equipped with a newly developed codec engine, the unit can output  
Full HD images at up to 60 fps via a network.  
*
1
Windows® Internet Explorer® 10.0  
*
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Professional SP1 64-bit  
2
/ 32-bit  
*
• The unit supports standard serial communication formats, allowing  
connection to commercially available controllers.  
Windows® Internet Explorer® 11.0 / 10.0 / 9.0  
3
/ 8.0  
*
• Connection with a Panasonic camera controller is also possible via  
Panasonic's proprietary serial communication format.  
For Mac:  
Mac OS 10.9  
Safari 7.0.2  
• The unit is available in white (AW-HE130W) or black (AW-HE130K) to  
suit your intended application and environment.  
Mac OS 10.8  
Safari 6.1.2  
Mac OS 10.7  
Safari 6.1.2  
For iPhone, iPad, iPod touch:  
iOS 7.1  
Standard browser  
For Android:  
Android OS  
Standard browser  
Other  
CD-ROM drive  
(for using the Operating Instructions and various  
software)  
Adobe® Reader®  
(
for viewing the Operating Instructions on the CD-  
ROM  
)
1
Use the desktop version of Internet Explorer. (Internet Explorer for  
Windows UI is not supported.)  
Windows® XP compatibility mode is not supported.  
The 64-bit version of Internet Explorer® is not supported.  
*
2
*
*
3
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before use (continued)  
Network security  
IMPORTANT  
• Failure to provide the required personal computer environment  
may slow down the delineation of the images on the screen, make  
it impossible for the web browser to work and cause other kinds of  
problems.  
As the unit intended to be used while connected to a network, the  
following security risks exist.  
A Leakage or theft of information through the unit  
B Unauthorized operation of the unit by persons with malicious intent  
C Interference with or stoppage of the unit by persons with malicious  
intent  
<NOTE>  
• For details on computer requirements and precautions when using  
Microsoft® Windows® 7, see “Notes on Windows® 7” (→page @@).  
• Depending on the software version of the unit, an update may be  
necessary.  
It is your responsibility to take precautions, such as those described  
below, to protect yourself against the above network security risks.  
• Use the desktop version of Internet Explorer. (Internet Explorer for  
Windows UI is not supported.)  
• For the latest information on compatible operating systems and web  
browsers, visit the support desk at the following website.  
• Use the unit in a network secured by a firewall, etc.  
• If the unit is connected to a network that includes personal computers,  
make sure that the system is not infected by computer viruses or other  
malicious programs (using a regularly updated antivirus program, anti-  
spyware program, etc.).  
http://pro-av.panasonic.net/  
• Protect your network against unauthorized access by restricting users  
to those who log in with an authorized user name and password.  
• Restrict access to the unit by authenticating the users, for example,  
to prevent setting information stored on the unit from leaking over the  
network.  
• Do not install the unit in locations where the unit, cables, and other  
parts can be easily damaged or destroyed by persons with malicious  
intent.  
Disclaimer of warranty  
IN NO EVENT SHALL Panasonic Corporation BE LIABLE TO ANY  
PARTY OR ANY PERSON, EXCEPT FOR REPLACEMENT OR  
REASONABLE MAINTENANCE OF THE PRODUCT, FOR THE  
CASES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO BELOW:  
A ANY DAMAGE AND LOSS, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION,  
DIRECT OR INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR  
EXEMPLARY, ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO THE  
PRODUCT;  
• Avoid connections that use public lines.  
<NOTE>  
Notes on user authentication  
B PERSONAL INJURY OR ANY DAMAGE CAUSED BY  
INAPPROPRIATE USE OR NEGLIGENT OPERATION OF THE  
USER;  
C UNAUTHORIZED DISASSEMBLE, REPAIR OR MODIFICATION  
OF THE PRODUCT BY THE USER;  
• User authentication on the unit can performed via digest authentication  
or basic authentication. If basic authentication is used without the use  
of a dedicated authentication device, password leaks may occur.  
We recommend using digest authentication or host authentication.  
Usage restrictions  
D INCONVENIENCE OR ANY LOSS ARISING WHEN IMAGES  
ARE NOT DISPLAYED, DUE TO ANY REASON OR CAUSE  
INCLUDING ANY FAILURE OR PROBLEM OF THE PRODUCT;  
E ANY PROBLEM, CONSEQUENTIAL INCONVENIENCE,  
OR LOSS OR DAMAGE, ARISING OUT OF THE SYSTEM  
COMBINED BY THE DEVICES OF THIRD PARTY;  
F ANY DEMANDS FOR COMPENSATION, CLAIMS, ETC.  
OCCASIONED BY THE INFRINGEMENT OF PRIVACY BY  
INDIVIDUALS OR ORGANIZATIONS WHOSE IMAGES WERE  
SHOT BY THE USER BECAUSE THESE IMAGES (INCLUDING  
THE RECORDINGS MADE) WERE MADE AVAILABLE BY THE  
USER BECAUSE IN THE PUBLIC DOMAIN FOR SOME REASON  
OR OTHER OR BECAUSE THE IMAGES ENDED UP BEING  
USED FOR PURPOSES OTHER THAN THE ONE DESCRIBED  
ABOVE;  
• We recommend connecting the unit, controller, and any computers to  
the same network segment.  
Events based on settings inherent to the network devices, for example,  
may occur in connections that include different segments, so be sure  
perform checks prior to operation.  
G LOSS OF REGISTERED DATA CAUSED BY ANY FAILURE.  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Features  
<NOTE>  
Multi-format support  
• You can switch between the following formats via the camera  
menus or a web browser.  
• It may be necessary to upgrade the version of the controller in  
order to support the unit.  
The maximum distances between the units and controller is  
1000 meters (3280 ft). (when serial control is exercised)  
Use of an external device or some other means must be  
provided separately in order to extend the video signal  
connections.  
Supported formats:  
1080/59.94p, 1080/29.97p, 1080/23.98p, 1080/59.94i,  
1080/29.97PsF, 1080/23.98PsF, 720/59.94p, 480/59.94p (HDMI)  
or 480/59.94i (SDI), 1080/50p, 1080/25p, 1080/50i, 1080/25PsF,  
720/50p, 576/50p (HDMI), and 576/50i (SDI)  
Easy construction of systems thanks to  
integrated design used for pan-tilt head,  
camera and lens  
• By integrating the camera, lens and pan-tilt head into a single unit,  
it is now easier to construct systems.  
In terms of the VIDEO OUT signals, 480/59.94i or 576/50i signals  
are output regardless of the format settings.  
These signals can be used for monitoring purposes.  
There is however a delay in the VIDEO OUT signal output by 120H  
(HD lines) when at 720p and at 90H (HD lines) for any other.  
• With the SD format, either "Squeeze", "LetterBox" or "SideCut"  
can be selected.  
Use of easy-to-operate wireless remote control  
(optional accessory) is possible  
• A wireless remote control capable of operating up to four units can  
be used.  
It can easily be used to set the various functions or switch  
between them while viewing the menu screens.  
1/2.86-type MOS sensor and high-performance  
20x zoom lens featured  
• A newly developed 1/2.86-type full HD 3MOS sensor and DSP  
(digital signal processor) are incorporated. High-quality pictures  
are obtained by video processing in many different kinds of ways.  
• In addition to its optical 20 zoom lens, the unit comes with a 10  
digital zoom to achieve high-quality images that overflow with  
ambiance.  
• A dynamic range stretch (DRS) function that compensates for  
overexposure and loss of dark detail and a digital noise reduction  
(DNR) function for minimizing image lag even in dark locations  
and shooting scenes clearly are incorporated to reproduce clean  
and clear images in a wide range of applications.  
Flexible camera layout enabled by simple  
connection and installation  
• This unit features excellent connectivity and installability thanks  
to the IP control; a lightweight main unit, and the turn-lock  
mechanism, which enables the user to install it on his or her own  
(only when used indoors).  
<NOTE>  
• Bear in mind that this unit is designed to be used indoors only:  
It cannot be used outdoors.  
Easy operation of unit enabled by its  
integration with a high-performance pan-tilt  
Increased functionality with the same compact  
size and weight of previous models  
• A wide range of features have been added while maintaining the  
compact size, weight, and footprint of previous models of the unit.  
head unit  
• Operations at the high speed of 60°/s  
• Wide rotational angles with a panning range of ±175° and a tilting  
range from –30° to 210°  
• Quiet operation with noise levels of NC35  
• Storage of up to 100 positions in the preset memory  
(The number of preset memories that can be used varies from one  
controller to another.)  
Easy connections and settings courtesy of IP  
control  
• Up to a hundred units can be operated by IP connection from a  
Panasonic controller (AW-RP120, AW-RP50, AK-HRP200).  
(The maximum length of the LAN cables is 100 meters [328 ft].)  
Built-in night mode  
• The unit supports infrared shooting.  
By exposing subjects to infrared rays, shooting under ordinarily  
difficult low-light conditions is possible.  
(Image output will be in black and white.)  
• The iris will be fixed at open.  
PoE+ 1 eliminates need for camera power  
configurations  
• Configurations for camera's power supply are not necessary when  
*
the unit is connected to a network device that supports the PoE+  
standard (IEEE802.3at compliant) 2ꢀ.  
*
IP image output functions  
<NOTE>  
• The unit is equipped with image compression and IP transmission  
LSI capabilities. Output in Full HD quality at up to 60 fps.  
• Operation with IP control allows for a wide range of applications,  
such as controlling the camera from remote locations.  
• When using a PoE+ device that requires software authentication, it  
may take a few minutes after power supply starts before the unit is  
operational.  
• If the AC adapter and a PoE+ power supply are connected  
simultaneously, the AC adapter will have priority. If the AC adapter is  
disconnected while both power supplies are connected, the unit will  
restart automatically, and the image will be interrupted.  
• Use a Category 5e cable or higher when using a PoE+ power supply.  
The maximum length of the cable between the power supply unit  
and the unit is 100 meters (328 ft). Using a cable that is lower than  
Category 5e may result in reuced power supply capabilities.  
Standard serial communication support  
• Connect up to seven cameras to a commercially available  
controller via RS-232C interface.  
High degree of compatibility with Panasonic’s  
currently available controllers, enabling a  
flexible system to be put together  
• A maximum of five units can be operated by serial control from  
one of Panasonic’s currently available controllers (AW-RP120,  
AW-RP50 and AW-HRP200).  
1
Power over Ethernet Plus. Referred to as "PoE+" in this manual.  
For details on PoE+ devices for which operation has been verified,  
consult your local dealer or Panasonic representative.  
*
2
*
The unit can also be used together with the cameras and pan-tilt  
head unit systems currently available from Panasonic Corporation  
so that an existing system can be used to advantage to put  
together a system that is even more flexible.  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controller supported  
zAW-RP120  
zAW-RP50  
zAK-HRP200  
• It may be necessary to upgrade the version of the controller in order to support the unit.  
Consult with your dealer.  
<NOTE>  
• The following operations can not be performed via the following controllers.  
Item  
AW-RP400  
AW-CB400  
AW-RP555  
AW-RP655  
Gain configuration  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Accessories  
Check that the following accessories are present and accounted for.  
• After removing the product from its container, dispose of the power cable cap and packing materials in an appropriate manner.  
CD-ROM (1)  
Mount bracket for installation Main unit mounting screw  
Power cable (1.8 m) (1)  
surface  
(Hanging / Desktop). (1)  
(with flat washer, spring  
washer)  
M3×6 mm (1)  
• Operating Instruction  
• Easy IP Setup Software  
(EasyIPSetup.exe)  
Drop-prevention wire. (1)  
Bracket mounting screws  
Cable cover (1)  
AC adaptor (1)  
Drop-prevention wire mounting (bind-head)  
screw(1)  
M4×10 mm (4)  
(comes attached to the unit)  
Optional accessories  
zWireless remote controller AW-RM50G (Size “AA” dry battery x 2, obtained separately)  
zDirect ceiling mount bracket WV-Q105  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operating precautions  
Shoot under the proper lighting conditions.  
To produce pictures with eye-pleasing colors, shoot under the  
proper lighting conditions.  
The pictures may not appear with their proper colors when shooting  
under fluorescent lights. Select the proper lighting as required.  
Concerning the HDMI interface standard  
This unit has been certified as HDMI-compatible, but on rare  
occasions images may not be displayed depending on the HDMI  
device which has been connected to the unit.  
Color bars  
To ensure a stable performance in the long  
term  
Using the unit for prolonged periods in locations where the  
temperature and humidity levels are high will cause its parts to  
deteriorate, resulting in a reduction of its service life.  
(Recommended temperature: Max. 35 °C [95 °F])  
Ensure that a cooling unit or heating unit will not blow any air  
directly toward the installation location.  
• Color bars are used to adjust the color phase, and the widths and  
positions of these bars may differ from other models.  
• The setting for the Down CONV. Mode item when color bars are  
displayed is fixed at “Squeeze”.  
Concerning the IP video frame rates  
The IP video frame rate may be slower depending on the network  
environment, performance of your computer or mobile terminal,  
subject of the video, and access volume.  
Bright subject  
Do not point the camera at  
Concerning PoE+ power supply  
strong lights.  
The unit complies with the IEEE802.3at standard. Use a compatible  
Ethernet hub and PoE+ injector to use a PoE+ power supply.  
For details on recommended Ethernet hubs and PoE+ injectors,  
consult your local dealer.  
When parts of the MOS sensor are  
exposed to spotlights or other strong  
lights, blooming (a phenomenon where  
the edges of strong lights become  
blurred) may occur.  
Turn off the power before connecting or  
disconnecting the cables.  
Blooming  
This unit is not equipped with a power switch.  
Turn off the DC12V power supply or PoE+ power supply device  
before connecting or disconnecting cables.  
What happens with high-brightness subjects  
Flare may occur if an extremely bright light source is pointed at  
the lens. In a case like this, change the angle or take some other  
remedial action.  
Handle the unit carefully.  
Do not drop the unit or subject it to strong impact or vibration.  
Failure to obey may cause the unit to malfunction.  
When using the automatic functions  
• The initial settings have been set to auto for some of the items  
of the scenes on the camera menus and other menus, making it  
impossible for these items to be operated manually. To operate  
them manually, switch from the auto settings to the manual  
settings as required.  
When the unit is not in use  
Turn off the unit’s power when it is not in use.  
When the unit is no longer going to be used, do not leave it lying  
around, but be absolutely sure to dispose of it properly.  
• When using the ATW (auto tracking white adjustment) function  
under fluorescent lights, the white balance may vary.  
• In some situations, it may be hard to focus at the auto setting. In  
cases like this, select the manual setting, and focus manually.  
Do not touch the optical system parts.  
The optical system parts are vital to the operation of the camera.  
Under no circumstances must they be touched.  
In the unlikely event that they have become dusty, remove the  
dust by using a camera blower or by wiping them gently with a lens  
cleaning paper.  
Zooming and focusing  
When the focus is set manually, out-of-focusing may occur during  
zooming.  
After zooming, if necessary, either adjust the focus or set the focus  
to auto.  
When using the focus at the manual setting, proceed with zooming  
after setting the focus position at the Tele end where the focusing  
accuracy is higher. (However, if the distance from the unit to the  
subject is less than 1.5 meters [4.92 ft], the subject may shift out of  
focus at the Wide end.)  
Do not point the camera directly at the sun or a  
laser beam no matter whether it is turned on or  
not.  
Taking images of the sun, laser beams, or other brightly lit subjects  
for prolonged periods of time may damage the CCD.  
If zooming is performed to the Tele end after having adjusted the  
focus at the Wide end, out-of-focusing may occur.  
Personal computer used  
If the same image is displayed for a prolonged period on a PC  
monitor, the monitor may be damaged. Use of a screen saver is  
recommended.  
Operation of the lens when the power is turned  
on  
Concerning the IP address setting  
Do not run the Easy IP Setup Software on a multiple number of  
personal computers for a single camera and set the IP address at  
the same time.  
Otherwise, you will be unable to complete the proper procedure and  
set the IP address correctly.  
When the unit’s power is turned on, the zoom, focus and iris are  
adjusted automatically.  
The unit comes with the safe mode.  
The safe mode is function designed to protect the unit from damage.  
Do not allow foreign matter to make contact  
with the rotating parts.  
Failure to obey may cause the unit to malfunction.  
Operating temperature range  
Avoid using the unit in cold locations where the temperature drops  
below 0 °C (32 °F) or hot locations where the temperature rises  
above 40 °C (104 °F) since these temperatures downgrade the  
picture quality and adversely affect the internal parts.  
Concerning the VIDEO OUT signal  
The VIDEO OUT signal is provided in case the images are to be  
monitored.  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operating precautions (continued)  
Do not get close to the moving parts of the  
camera head.  
Do not put your fingers or body close to the unit while it is  
in operation. Doing so may result in injury or cause the unit to  
malfunction.  
Furthermore, if the unit hits a person or obstacle, during the panning  
or tilting operation, the unit will enter into the safe mode.  
For further details, refer to page 112.  
Keep the unit away from water.  
Avoid all direct contact with water. Failure to obey may cause the  
unit to malfunction.  
Maintenance  
Turn off the unit’s power before proceeding with maintenance.  
Failure to obey may result in injuries.  
Wipe the surfaces using a soft dry cloth. Avoid all contact with  
benzene, paint thinners and other volatile substances, and avoid  
using these substances. Otherwise, the casing may become  
discolored.  
Do not turn the camera head by hand.  
Turning the camera head by hand may cause the unit to  
malfunction.  
Use the unit in an environment with minimal  
moisture and dust.  
Avoid using the unit in an environment with high concentration of  
moisture or dust since these conditions will damage the internal  
parts.  
Disposal of the unit  
When the unit has reached the end of its service life and is to be  
disposed of, ask a qualified contractor to dispose of the unit properly  
in order to protect the environment.  
Information on software used with this product  
This product includes GNU General Public License (GPL) and GNU Lesser General Public License (LGPL) licensed software, and the customer is  
entitled to obtain, modify, or redistribute the source code for the software.  
This product included MIT Licensed software.  
This product included BSD Licensed software.  
For details on obtaining the source codes, visit the following website.  
http://panasonic.biz/sav/  
However, do not contact Panasonic for questions regarding obtained source codes.  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Wireless remote control (optional accessory)  
This unit can be operated by remote control using a wireless  
remote control (model number: AW-RM50G) purchased separately.  
Check out the following points before using the wireless remote  
control.  
Layout of wireless remote control signal light-sensing areas  
<NOTE>  
• The arrows in the figure below show the light-sensing directions in  
which the wireless remote control signals travel.  
zPoint the wireless remote control at the unit’s wireless  
remote control signal light-sensing area (front panel or  
back panel), and operate it within a range of 10 meters  
(32.8 ft) from these areas.  
Wireless remote control  
signal light-sensing area  
(back panel, 1 place)  
zRefer to “Layout of wireless remote control signal  
light-sensing areas” on the right.  
Wireless remote  
control signal light-  
sensing area (front  
panel, 2 places)  
zThe signal sensing distance is reduced if the angle at  
which the wireless remote control signals are sensed is  
increased.  
The light-sensing sensitivity is reduced to about one-half when the  
wireless remote control is pointed at an angle of 40 degrees from  
each position in front of a wireless remote control signal light-sensing  
area (front panel or back panel).  
If the remote control is operated from the behind the unit, it may be  
either difficult or impossible to perform the desired operations.  
zIf the unit is installed near fluorescent lights, plasma  
monitors or other such products or if the unit is  
exposed to sunlight, the effects of the light may make it  
impossible for the unit to be operated using the wireless  
remote control.  
Top view  
Be sure to follow the steps below for installation and use.  
• Take steps to ensure that the wireless remote control signal light-  
sensing area will not be exposed to the light from fluorescent lights,  
plasma monitors or other such products or from the sun.  
• Install the unit away from fluorescent lights, plasma monitors and  
other such products.  
zFor about 10 minutes even after the batteries have been  
removed from the wireless remote control, the selection  
of the operation to be performed (the <CAM1>, <CAM2>,  
<CAM3> or <CAM4> button which was pressed last) will  
remain stored in the memory.  
When a longer period of time elapses, however, the  
selection is reset to the status established when the  
<CAM1> button was pressed.  
Approx.  
Approx.  
45°  
45°  
Rear panel view  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Parts and their functions  
Camera unit  
1. Mount bracket for installation surface (supplied  
accessory)  
Mount this bracket onto the installation surface, and then attach the  
camera main unit to the bracket.  
2. Drop-prevention wire  
This wire is screwed down to the bottom panel of the camera main  
unit. Loop the circle part of the wire around the hook of the mount  
bracket.  
1
3. Hole for securing the camera pedestal  
This hole is provided in the bottom panel of the camera pedestal.  
4
2
5
4. Wireless remote control signal light-sensing area  
The light-sensing area is provided in three places, on the front panel  
of the camera pedestal and at the top of the rear panel.  
5. Status display lamp  
This lights in the following way depending on the status of the unit.  
Orange: When the standby status is established  
Green: When the power is on  
Red:  
Green and blinks twice:  
When a signal matched by the remote control ID has  
When trouble has occurred in the unit  
7
4
been received from the wireless remote control (optional  
accessory) while the power is on  
Orange and blinks twice:  
When a signal not matched by the remote control ID has  
been received from the wireless remote control (optional  
accessory) while the power is on  
3
6. Camera head  
This rotates in the up and down direction.  
6
8
7. Tilt head  
This rotates in the right and left direction.  
8. Tally lamp  
This comes on or goes off in response to the control from the  
controller but only when “On” has been selected as the tally lamp use  
setting.  
Rear panel  
16 22  
18  
9. RS-422 connector [RS-422]  
This RS-422 connector (RJ45) is connected when exercising serial  
control over the unit from an external device. Use a cable with the  
following specifications for the connection to this connector.  
The tally lamp can be lit by shorting the TALLY signal (pin 2) with  
GND (pin 1).  
<NOTE>  
21 13 9  
10  
17 1523 14  
12 19 20 21  
11  
• Do not apply a voltage to the TALLY signal pin.  
LAN cable (category 5 or above, straight cable), max. 1000 m  
[3280 ft]  
*
Bottom panel  
:
Use of an STP (shielded twisted pair) cable is recommended.  
*
Pin  
No.  
1
Pin  
No.  
5
3
Signal  
GND  
Signal  
TXD+  
2
3
4
TALLY  
RXD–  
TXD–  
6
7
8
RXD+  
25  
24  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Parts and their functions (continued)  
10.RS-232C connectors <RS-232C IN/OUT>  
Connects to an RS-232C cable.  
17.SDI OUT connector <SDI OUT>  
This is the SDI video signal output connector.  
RS-232C IN  
RS-232C OUT  
RS-232C IN/OUT  
connector appearance  
Pin  
No.  
1
Pin  
No.  
18.DC IN connector <12V  
IN  
>
Signal  
Signal  
Connect the AC adaptor supplied with the unit to this connector to  
supply the DC 12 V voltage to the unit.  
7
DTR_IN  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
DTR_OUT  
DSR_OUT  
TXD_OUT  
GND  
8
6
2
DSR_IN  
TXD_IN  
GND  
5
4
3
3
19.Cable clamp  
This is used to hold the cable connection to the DC IN connector and  
prevent it from becoming disconnected.  
4
2
1
5
RXD_IN  
GND  
RXD_OUT  
GND  
6
Mini Din 8-pin (JST)  
7
IR OUT R  
IR OUT L  
NC  
20.IR ID switches <IR ID>  
8
NC  
CAM1  
CAM2  
CAM3  
CAM4  
<NOTE>  
• Be aware that the polarities (+/-) of the serial data may be different  
depending on the specifications of the device to be connected.  
11.LAN connector for IP control <LINK/ACT>  
This LAN connector (RJ45) is connected when exercising IP control  
over the unit from an external device. Use a cable with the following  
specifications for the connection to this connector.  
These are used to select the ID of the wireless remote control  
(optional accessory).  
The IR ID switch settings “CAM1” to “CAM4” correspond to the  
<CAM1> to <CAM4> buttons on the wireless remote control.  
When using a PoE+ Ethernet hub  
LAN cable 1 (category 5e or above, straight cable), max. 100  
*
m [3280 ft]  
21.Square holes (X2) for cable cover tabs  
The tabs on the two sides of the cable cover are fitted into these  
holes.  
When not using a PoE+ Ethernet hub  
LAN cable 1 (category 5 or above, straight cable), max. 100 m  
*
[3280 ft]  
1
Use of an STP (shielded twisted pair) cable is recommended.  
*
22.<AUDIO IN> connector  
Inputs external audio (microphone, line).  
12.HDMI connector [HDMI]  
This is the HDMI video output connector.  
23.Ground connector  
Connects to the ground connector on a wall outlet, ground bar, etc.  
for grounding. (→ page @@)  
13.Anti-theft wire mounting hole  
The anti-theft wire bracket (available from a hardware store) is  
attached here.  
24.Tripod screw holes  
(Screw: 1/4-20 UNC, ISO 1222 (6.35 mm))  
Use these screw holes when securing the unit to a tripod, etc.  
14.G/L IN connector <G/L IN>  
This is the external sync signal input connector.  
This unit supports BBS (Black Burst Sync) and tri-level  
synchronization.  
25.Service switches  
SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4  
SW5 SW6 SW7 SW8  
Supply to this connector the signals that correspond to the video  
signal format which has been set.  
ON  
OFF  
External sync signal input format  
Format  
BBS  
480/59.94i  
Tri-level sync  
1080/59.94p  
1080/29.97p  
1080/23.98p  
1080/59.94i  
1080/59.94i  
480/59.94i  
1080/59.94i  
1080/29.97PsF  
1080/23.98PsF  
720/59.94p  
Function  
OFF  
ON  
Factory  
settings  
480/59.94i  
480/59.94i  
720/59.94p  
480/59.94p(i)  
SW1 Camera  
See descriptions for SW1 to SW3  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
1080/50p  
1080/25p  
1080/50i  
1080/25PsF  
720/50p  
576/50i  
1080/50i  
address setting  
(standard serial  
communication)  
SW2  
SW3  
576/50i  
1080/50i  
576/50i  
576/50i  
720/50p  
SW4 Communication Panasonic  
Standard serial  
proprietary serial communication  
communication  
OFF  
576/50p(i)  
format  
<NOTE>  
SW5 Always leave at OFF (used for factory adjustments)  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
• Locking to a subcarrier is not possible with BBS.  
SW6 Infrared output  
Disable  
Enable  
SW7 Communication 9600 bps  
baud rate  
38400 bps  
15.VIDEO OUT connector <VIDEO OUT>  
This is the output connector used for monitoring the camera’s  
composite video signals. Use the monitor in the internal  
synchronization mode.  
SW8 Communication RS-422  
connector  
RS-232C  
OFF  
Provide a BNC coaxial cable as the connecting cable.  
There is a delay in the VIDEO OUT signal output by 120H (HD lines)  
when at 720p and at 90H (HD lines) for any other.  
<NOTE>  
• Perform switch settings before turning the unit on.  
• Cameras whose camera address setting switches are set to AUTO  
cannot coexist with cameras whose switches are set to 1 to 7.  
• Manually setting multiple cameras to the same address will not  
allow you to control multiple cameras from a single controller  
simultaneously.  
16.Hole used to secure cable cover  
Use the screw provided to secure the cable cover.  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Parts and their functions (continued)  
Service switch settings  
SW1 to SW3 (camera address setting switches)  
Configure the camera address.  
Simultaneous output conditions for each video  
format  
Set this to AUTO under normal circumstances. When cameras are set  
to AUTO, addresses will be assigned to the cameras automatically  
in response operation from the controller in the order in which the  
cameras were connected.  
zSDI/HDMI/VIDEO output  
SDI  
output  
HDMI  
output  
VIDEO  
output  
Format  
To manually configure the address, set the switches as follows.  
HD/SDI  
1080/59.94p  
1080/50p  
Address AUTO  
1
ON  
ON  
ON  
2
3
4
5
6
7
SW1  
SW2  
SW3  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF ON  
OFF ON  
OFF OFF ON  
ON ON OFF OFF OFF  
OFF ON  
1080/59.94i  
1080/50i  
ON  
ON  
ON OFF  
1080/29.97psF  
1080/25psF  
1080/23.98psF  
1080/29.97p  
1080/25p  
SW4 (communication format selection switch)  
Selects the communication format.  
When this is set to ON, standard serial communication is enabled.  
When this is set to OFF, Panasonic's proprietary serial  
communication is enabled.  
1080/23.98p  
720/59.94p  
720/50p  
SW5 (maintenance switch)  
Fixed at OFF.  
Do not change this switch setting.  
SD/SDI  
480/59.94p  
576/50p  
1
480/59.94i  
576/50i  
*
SW6 (infrared output switch)  
1
*
When this is set to ON, infrared output is enabled. The signal received  
via the remote control sensor is output from pins 7 and 8 of the <RS-  
232C IN> connector.  
1
480/59.94i and 576/50i is output to the VIDEO output regardless of  
the format setting.  
*
Signal output is disabled when this is set to OFF.  
zIP video transmission output (1-/multi-channel display)  
SW7 (communication baud rate switch)  
When this is set to ON, the baud rate is 38400 bps.  
When this is set to OFF, the baud rate is 9600 bps.  
1-channel display  
Resolution  
1920×1080 / 1280×720 / 640×360 / 320×180 / 160×90  
(non-dependent on SYS format)  
SW8 (communication connector switch)  
When this is set to ON, the RS-422 is enabled.  
When this is set to OFF, the RS-232C is enabled.  
Frame 60Hz  
rate  
1 fps/2 fps/3 fps/5 fps/6 fps/10 fps/15 fps/30 fps/  
1
60 fps  
*
2
50Hz  
1 fps/2 fps/5 fps/10 fps/12.5 fps/25 fps/50 fps  
*
1
2
60 fps only during H.264 transmission and 1920×1080 or 1280×720  
resolution  
50 fps only during H.264 transmission and 1920×1080 or 1280×720  
resolution  
*
*
Multi-channel display  
Setting  
H.264 CH1 H.264 CH2 H.264 CH3/ JPEG CH1/  
3
CH4  
CH2/CH3  
*
Resolution  
1920×1080 / 1920×1080 / 1280×720 / 1920×1080 /  
1280×720  
1280×720 / 640×360 /  
1280×720 /  
640×360 /  
320×180 /  
160×90  
640×360 /  
320×180 /  
160×90  
320×180 /  
160×90  
Frame 60Hz  
rate  
60fps  
5 fps/15 fps/ 5 fps/15 fps/ 1 fps/2 fps/  
30 fps  
30 fps  
3 fps/5 fps/  
6 fps/10 fps/  
15 fps/30 fps  
50Hz  
50 fps  
5 fps/  
12.5 fps/  
25 fps  
5 fps/  
12.5 fps/  
25 fps  
1 fps/2 fps/  
5 fps/10 fps/  
12.5 fps/  
25 fps  
3
Different resolutions must be specified for JPEG CH1 / CH2 / CH3.  
*
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Parts and their functions (continued)  
Wireless remote control (not supplied)  
6. MODE button <MODE>  
2
This is used to select the video signals which are output from the unit.  
Each time it is pressed, the signals are switched between the color  
bar signals and camera video signals.  
<NOTE>  
3
1
4
• The setting for the Down CONV. Mode item when color bars are  
displayed is fixed at “Squeeze”.  
14  
7. GAIN button <OFF> <LOW> <HI> <AUTO>  
These are used to set the gain.  
5
6
The gain increase can be set in three steps using the <OFF>, <LOW>  
and <HI> buttons.  
7
<LOW> is set to 9 dB, and <HI> is set to 18 dB.  
When the <AUTO> button is pressed, the AGC function is activated,  
and the gain is adjusted automatically depending on the light quantity.  
The maximum gain of the AGC function can be set using the camera  
menu.  
8
8. Preset memory call buttons <1> to <12>  
These are used to call the information on the unit’s directions and  
other settings, which have been registered in the unit’s preset  
memories No.1 to No.12, and reproduce those settings.  
Settings in preset memories No.13 and above cannot be called from  
the wireless remote control.  
15  
16  
9
10  
9. PRESET/LIMIT button <PRESET/LIMIT>  
This is used to register the settings in the preset memories or set or  
release the limiters.  
When a preset memory call button is pressed while the PRESET/  
LIMIT button is held down, the information on the unit’s current  
direction and other settings is registered in the call button.  
Preset memory call buttons <1> to <12> correspond to the unit’s No.1  
to No.12 preset memories.  
Furthermore, the pan and tilt movement range limits (limiters) are set  
and released by operating the PRESET/LIMIT button, MENU button  
and the pan/tilt buttons (<4> <5> <b> <a>).  
11  
17  
21  
18  
12  
19  
20  
22  
13  
10.Pan-tilt buttons and menu operation buttons  
<4> <5> <b> <a> <M>  
1) These are used to change the unit’s direction.  
The unit is tilted in the up/down direction using the <4> and <5>  
buttons and panned in the left/right direction using the <b> and  
<a> buttons.  
1. ON/STANDBY button <ON/STANDBY>  
Each time this is pressed for 2 seconds, operation switches between  
turning on the unit’s power and establishing the standby status.  
The <M> button does not work during tilting and panning.  
When the <4> or <5> and <b> or <a> buttons are pressed at the  
same time, the unit moves diagonally.  
2) The buttons are used for menu operations when the unit displays  
the camera menus.  
2. Signal transmission window  
Use the <4> , <5> (<b>, <a>) buttons to select the menu items.  
When a selected item has a sub-menu, the sub-menu will be  
displayed by pressing the <M> button.  
When the cursor is aligned with a particular item and the <M>  
button is pressed on the setting menu at the bottom hierarchical  
level, the setting of the selected item blinks.  
3. MENU button <MENU>  
Each time this is pressed for 2 seconds, operation switches between  
displaying the unit’s camera menu and exiting the camera menu.  
When it is pressed quickly (for less than 2 seconds) while a camera  
menu is displayed, the setting change is canceled.  
When the <M> button is pressed after the setting has been  
changed using the <4> and <5> (<b> and <a>) buttons, the  
setting stops blinking, and the new setting is entered.  
A setting for a regular menu item is reflected immediately if it is  
changed while it is still flashing.  
Furthermore, the pan and tilt movement range limits (limiters) are set  
and released by operating the <PRESET/LIMIT> button and the pan/  
tilt buttons (<4> <5> <b> <a>).  
If the MENU button is pressed quickly (for less than 2 seconds)  
while the setting is in the blinking status, the change will be  
canceled, and the setting selected prior to the change will be  
restored.  
4. CAM1 to CAM4 buttons <CAM1> <CAM2> <CAM3>  
<CAM4>  
Selects a camera to be operated.  
Once a button has been selected, the unit corresponding to the  
selected button can be operated.  
<NOTE>  
• To prevent malfunctioning, there are a number of menu items  
(Scene, Format, Down Conv. Mode and Frequency) whose setting  
is not reflected immediately even if it is changed while it is still  
flashing.  
It is reflected only after the <M> button has been pressed, causing  
the setting to stop flashing and the new setting to be entered.  
• A confirmation screen appears before the settings of some menu  
items are to be entered.  
5. SET button <SET>  
If this button is held down for 2 seconds when the AWB A memory or  
AWB B memory has been selected for the white balance adjustment,  
the black balance and white balance are adjusted automatically and  
registered in the memory selected.  
When this button is pressed for under 2 seconds, only the white  
balance is adjusted automatically.  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Parts and their functions (continued)  
11.FOCUS button <F> <N>  
These are used to adjust the lens focus manually when the manual  
setting is established for the lens focus.  
The focus is adjusted in the far using the [F] button and in the near  
using the [N] button.  
12.A/FOCUS button <A/FOCUS>  
This is used when automatically adjusting the lens focus.  
13.M/FOCUS button <M/FOCUS>  
This is used when manually adjusting the lens focus.  
The FOCUS buttons (<F> and <N>) are used when performing the  
actual adjustment.  
14.OPT button <ON> <OFF>  
Turns the ND filter ON/OFF.  
15.HOME button <HOME>  
When this is pressed for 2 seconds, the unit’s direction (panning or  
tilting) returns to the reference position.  
16.ZOOM button <T> <W>  
These are used to adjust the lens zoom.  
The zoom is adjusted in the wide-angle using the <W> button and in  
the telephoto using the [T] button.  
17.FAST button <FAST>  
This is used to change the movement speed at which the panning,  
tilting, zooming and focusing operations are performed to the high  
speed.  
<NOTE>  
• The operating speed for panning and tilting when the preset  
memory settings have been called can be changed using the Preset  
Speed item of the camera menu.  
18.SLOW button <SLOW>  
This is used to change the movement speed at which the panning,  
tilting, zooming and focusing operations are performed to the low  
speed.  
19.A/IRIS button <A/IRIS>  
This establishes the setting for adjusting the lens iris automatically in  
line with the light quantity.  
20.M/IRIS button <A/IRIS>  
This establishes the setting for adjusting the lens iris manually.  
The <IRIS +> and <IRIS –> buttons are used when performing the  
actual adjustment.  
21.IRIS + buuton <IRIS +>  
This is used to adjust the lens iris in the opening direction.  
22.IRIS - button <IRIS ->  
This is used to adjust the lens iris in the closing direction.  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting the remote control IDs  
The wireless remote control (optional accessory) is capable of operating  
up to four units.  
IDs are used to set which units are selected when the <CAM1>,  
<CAM2>, <CAM3> and <CAM4> buttons on the wireless remote control  
have been pressed.  
• When operating a multiple number of these units using wireless  
remote controls, set a different remote control ID for each control.  
• When using one unit, set the remote control ID to “CAM1” unless the  
setting needs to be changed.  
Setting procedure  
Operate the IR ID switch on the units rear panel, and select “CAM1”,  
“CAM2”, “CAM3” or “CAM4” as the remote control ID. (→page 19)  
The IR ID switch settings “CAM1” to “CAM4” correspond to the <CAM1>  
to <CAM4> buttons on the wireless remote control.  
(The factory setting is “CAM1”.)  
IR ID switches  
<CAM1> to <CAM4> buttons  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Network settings  
1. Start the Easy IP Setup Software.  
2. Click the [Search] button.  
Installing the software  
Be absolutely sure to read through the “Readme.txt” on the CD-ROM  
supplied with the unit first before attempting to install the software.  
Software provided on the CD-ROM  
zEasy IP Setup Software (EasyIPSetup.exe)  
This software establishes the unit’s network settings. For details,  
refer to the sections that follow.  
Use the Easy IP Setup Software to establish the  
unit’s settings  
The settings related to the unit’s network can be established using the  
Easy IP Setup Software supplied.  
To establish the settings for a multiple number of units, the settings must  
be selected for each camera involved.  
If the settings cannot be established using the Easy IP Setup Software,  
select the settings separately for the unit and personal computer on the  
network page of the setting menu. (→ page @@)  
<NOTE>  
3. Click the MAC address/IPv4 address of the camera to be  
set, and click the [Network Settings] button.  
• If, after the network settings have been established, another device in  
the same network has the same IP address, the network operations  
will not be performed properly.  
Set the IP address in such a way that it does not duplicate an existing  
IP address.  
• Do not establish network settings from a multiple number of Easy IP  
Setup Software programs at the same time for a single camera.  
Similarly, do not perform the “Auto IP setting” operation of the  
AW-RP50 remote camera controller at the same time.  
The IP address settings may no longer be recognized as a result.  
• The Easy IP Setup Software is designed in such a way that when  
around 20 or more minutes have passed after the power was turned  
on, the MAC address and IP address of the target camera will no  
longer be displayed.  
For details of the display time setting, refer to “Easy IP Setup  
accommodate period” (→page @@).  
• The Easy IP Setup Software cannot be used from a different subnet  
via a router.  
<NOTE>  
• When a DHCP server is being used, the IP address allocated to the  
unit can be checked by clicking the [Search] button of the Easy IP  
Setup Software.  
• If the same IP address is used for any additional cameras, the  
numbers of the additional cameras will be displayed in the “IPv4  
overlap” column of the cameras concerned.  
• The unit cannot be displayed or its settings established using an older  
version of the Easy IP Setup Software (Ver.2.xx).  
• When the [Access Camera] button is clicked, the Live screen of the  
selected camera is displayed.  
• This unit does not support an IPv4/IPv6 switching function.  
4. Input the network items, and click the [Save] button.  
<NOTE>  
• When a DHCP server is being used, “DNS” of the Easy IP Setup  
Software can be set to “Auto”.  
• After the [Save] button is clicked, it takes about 2 minutes for the  
settings in the unit to be completed. If the AC adaptor or LAN cable is  
disconnected before the settings are completed, the settings will be  
canceled. In this case, repeat the steps to establish the settings.  
• When a firewall (including software) has been introduced, enable  
access to all the UDP ports.  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic shooting operations  
1. Set the subject brightness to the appropriate level.  
5. Start shooting.  
(After shooting, turn off the power of all the units and  
devices in the system.)  
2. Turn on the power of all the units and devices in the  
system.  
<NOTE>  
• Some of the initial settings are auto settings and cannot be operated  
manually. To operate them manually, switch from the auto settings to  
the manual settings as required.  
3. Select the unit to be operated.  
Even when using only one unit, it must still be selected from the  
wireless remote control or controller.  
If the settings have already been changed and the original settings are  
to be restored, refer to the “What to do when encountering problems  
4. Select the shooting mode.  
One of four shooting modes (Scene1, Scene2, Scene3 or Scene4)  
— whichever one will best suit the shooting conditions — can be  
selected.  
The shooting modes are set by the user.  
For details of the factory settings, refer to pages 61 to 63.  
Select the mode that satisfies the shooting conditions and suits your  
preferences.  
When continuing to shoot in the same circumstances, there is no  
need to select another mode.  
How to turn the power on and off  
Turning the power on  
Turning the power off  
When performing operations from a wireless  
remote control  
When performing operations from a wireless  
remote control  
1. Set all the power switches of the units and devices  
connected in the system to ON.  
1. Press one of the <CAM1> to <CAM4> buttons on the  
wireless remote control to select the unit.  
• This unit does not have a power switch.  
When power is supplied to it, the status display lamp will light up  
orange, and the unit is set to the standby mode.  
2. Press the <ON/STANDBY> button on the wireless remote  
control for 2 seconds.  
The unit enters STANDBY mode.  
2. Press one of the <CAM1> to <CAM4> buttons on the  
wireless remote control to select the unit.  
• The unit's status display lamp lights orange during this time.  
3. If a multiple number of units are going to be used, repeat  
steps 1 and 2 as required.  
3. Press the <ON/STANDBY> button on the wireless remote  
control for 2 seconds.  
The POWER ON mode is established, images are output, and control  
can be exercised.  
• The unit’s status display lamp now lights up green.  
<NOTE>  
4. Set all the power switches of the units and devices  
connected in the system to OFF.  
• This unit does not have a power switch.  
• It takes maximum 30 seconds per unit for the initial settings  
operation to be completed. During this period, the unit cannot be  
operated.  
<NOTE>  
• When operation is transferred to the STANDBY mode:  
The current zoom, focus and iris positions are stored in the memory  
(POWER ON preset).  
(Status display lamp: light up orange)  
• When operation is transferred to the POWER ON mode:  
The zoom, focus and iris are adjusted to the positions which were  
stored in the memory (POWER ON preset) when operation was  
transferred to the STANDBY mode.  
4. If a multiple number of units are going to be used, repeat  
steps 2 and 3 as required.  
The unit’s status display lamp blinks green when a signal matched by  
the remote control ID has been received, and it blinks orange when a  
signal that is not matched by the remote control ID has been received.  
When performing operations from a controller  
When using a AW-RP50, AW-RP120, or AK-HRP200  
<NOTE>  
Refer to the operating instructions for the controller.  
• When operation is transferred to the STANDBY mode:  
The current zoom, focus and iris positions are stored in the memory  
(POWER ON preset).  
When using a commercially available controller  
Refer to the operating instructions for the controller.  
• When operation is transferred to the POWER ON mode:  
The zoom, focus and iris are adjusted to the positions which were  
stored in the memory (POWER ON preset) when operation was  
transferred to the STANDBY mode.  
When performing operations from a controller  
When using a AW-RP50, AW-RP120, or AK-HRP200  
Refer to the operating instructions for the controller.  
When using a commercially available controller  
Refer to the operating instructions for the controller.  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Selecting the units  
Up to four units can be operated using one wireless remote control.  
Up to five units can be operated using one controller.  
Select the unit (or units) to be operated from the wireless remote control  
or controller.  
Even when using only one unit, it must still be selected.  
When performing operations from a wireless  
remote control  
To select the unit using the wireless remote control, the IR ID switches  
on the unit’s back panel must be set.  
For details of the IR ID switch settings, refer to pages @@, page @@.  
1. Press the <CAM1>, <CAM2>, <CAM3>, or <CAM4>  
button.  
The unit’s status display lamp blinks green when a signal matched by  
the remote control ID has been received, and it blinks orange when a  
signal that is not matched by the remote control ID has been received.  
When performing operations from a controller  
When using a AW-RP50, AW-RP120, or AK-HRP200  
Refer to the operating instructions for the controller.  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Selecting the shooting modes (scene files)  
4. Press the <M> button.  
The [Camera] sub-menu is displayed on the monitor.  
Types of shooting modes  
One of four shooting modes (Scene1, Scene2, Scene3 or Scene4) —  
whichever one will best suit the shooting conditions — can be selected.  
The shooting modes are set by the user.  
For details of the factory settings, refer to pages 61 to 63.  
Select the mode that satisfies the shooting conditions and suits your  
preferences.  
Camera  
Scene  
Scene1  
Brightness  
Picture  
Matrix  
The settings can be changed by menu operations.  
• The results of the white balance and other adjustments are stored in  
the memory separately by shooting mode. Be absolutely sure to select  
the shooting mode before making any adjustments.  
<NOTE>  
Return  
• Some of the initial settings are auto settings and cannot be operated  
manually. To operate them manually, switch from the auto settings to  
the manual settings as required.  
5. Press the <4> or <5> button to bring the cursor to  
[Scene].  
Scene1  
Scene2  
Scene3  
6. Press the <M> button.  
The shooting mode blinks.  
Scene4  
7. Press the <4> or <5> button to select the shooting mode  
(Scene1, Scene2, Scene3 or Scene4) to be used, and  
press the <M> button to enter the selection.  
The settings of your preferences can be established in line with the  
shooting scene, lighting and other conditions.  
8. Press and hold the <MENU> button for about 2 seconds.  
The camera menu display is exited.  
How to select the shooting mode  
When performing operations from a wireless  
remote control  
When performing operations from a controller  
When using a AW-RP50, AW-RP120, or AK-HRP200  
Refer to the operating instructions for the controller.  
2, 8  
1
3, 5, 7  
4, 6, 7  
1. Press the <CAM1>, <CAM2>, <CAM3> or <CAM4> button  
to select the unit.  
2. Press and hold the <MENU> button for about 2 seconds.  
The Top Menu is displayed.  
Top Menu  
Camera  
Scene: Scene1  
System  
Maintenance  
3. Press the <4> or <5> button to bring the cursor to  
[Camera].  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Shooting  
When performing operations from a wireless  
remote control  
When performing operations from a controller  
Changing the camera’s direction  
Moving the camera toward the left or right (panning):  
Changing the camera’s direction  
Tilt the <PAN/TILT> lever toward L or R.  
Moving the camera toward the left or right (panning):  
Press the <b> or <a> button.  
Moving the camera up or down (tilting):  
Tilt the <PAN/TILT> lever toward UP or DOWN.  
Moving the camera up or down (tilting):  
Press the <4> or <5> button.  
Moving the camera diagonally:  
Tilt the <PAN/TILT> lever diagonally.  
Moving the camera diagonally:  
Press the <4> or <5> button and <b> or <a> button at the same  
time.  
Returning the camera to the reference position:  
If the controller has a <HOME> button, press the <HOME> button.  
Returning the camera to the reference position:  
Press the [HOME] button for 2 seconds.  
Using the zoom function  
Zooming in (the subject becomes magnified in size):  
Tilt the <ZOOM> lever toward the TELE direction.  
Using the zoom function  
Zooming in (the subject becomes magnified in size):  
Zooming out (the subject becomes reduced in size):  
Tilt the <ZOOM> lever toward the WIDE direction.  
Press the [T] button of [ZOOM].  
Zooming out (the subject becomes reduced in size):  
Press the [W] button of [ZOOM].  
Switching the panning/tilting and lens operation  
speed  
Switching the panning/tilting and lens  
operation speed  
When using a AW-RP50, AW-RP120, or AK-HRP200  
Refer to the operating instructions for the controller.  
Changing the direction or zoom at high speed:  
Press the <FAST> button.  
Changing the direction or zoom at low speed:  
Press the <SLOW> button.  
The speeds at which the pan, tilt, zoom, focus and iris are controlled are  
now switched.  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
What to do when encountering problems in the basic shooting operations  
If the trouble is not resolved by taking the action suggested below, refer  
When performing operations from a controller  
The unit does not move.  
When performing operations from a wireless  
remote control  
• Select the unit to be operated by following the procedure below.  
When using a AW-RP50, AW-RP120, or AK-HRP200  
Refer to the operating instructions for the controller.  
The unit does not move.  
• Press the <CAM1>, <CAM2>, <CAM3> or <CAM4> button to select  
the unit which is to be operated.  
If only one unit is being used, it is normally selected using the <CAM1>  
button.  
• If the <OPERATE> lamp on the controller is off, it means that the  
power of the controller is not on.  
• If the unit’s status display lamp is off or lights up orange, it means that  
the unit’s power is not on.  
Refer to “Turning the power on” (→ page 25), and turn on the power.  
• Check that the IR ID switches have been set correctly. (→page @@,  
page @@)  
Multiple color bands (color bars) are displayed.  
Switch to the camera image by pressing the <MODE> button.  
• If the unit’s status display lamp is off or lights up orange, it means that  
the unit’s power is not on.  
Refer to “Turning the power on” (→ page 25), and turn on the power.  
• If the unit’s status display lamp does not blink even when the wireless  
remote control is operated near the unit’s wireless remote control  
signal light-sensing area, it means that the wireless remote control’s  
batteries have run down.  
The menu screen is displayed.  
Press the <MENU> button to exit the camera menu.  
The lens focus is not adjusted automatically.  
Press the <EXT(AF)> button to switch to auto focusing.  
Replace the batteries.  
Multiple color bands (color bars) are displayed.  
Switch to the camera image by pressing the <MODE> button.  
The camera picture is too light or too dark.  
1. Press the <IRIS> button several times to turn on its lamp,  
and switch the lens iris adjustment to auto.  
2. Press the <GAIN> button several times to turn on its lamp,  
and switch the gain adjustment to auto.  
The menu screen is displayed.  
Press the <MENU> button for 2 seconds to exit the camera menu.  
The lens focus is not adjusted automatically.  
Press the <A/FOCUS> button to switch to auto focusing.  
Something is wrong with the coloring of the camera  
pictures.  
to “ATW”.  
The camera picture is too light or too dark.  
1. Press the <A/IRIS> button to switch the lens iris adjustment  
to auto.  
2. Press the <AUTO> button of <GAIN> to switch the gain  
adjustment to auto.  
The camera menus are not displayed.  
If any of the camera menus are displayed within less than a minute after  
the camera was restarted, the menus will be displayed in all the outputs.  
Check [OSD Mix] (→ page 58)on the camera menu [Other 3/4] screen.  
Something is wrong with the coloring of the camera  
pictures.  
to “ATW”.  
The camera menus are not displayed.  
If any of the camera menus are displayed within less than a minute after  
the camera was restarted, the menus will be displayed in all the outputs.  
Check [OSD Mix] (→ page 58)on the camera menu [Other 3/4] screen.  
More advanced operations  
• Manually adjusting the focus  
• Manually adjusting the iris  
• Manually adjusting the shutter speed  
• Manually adjusting the gain  
• This adjustment is performed to express the black accurately. Its  
setting also has an effect on the color tones of the entire screen.  
• It must be performed when using the unit for the first time or when the  
unit has not been used for a prolonged period.  
• It must be performed when the ambient temperature has changed  
significantly and at the change of the seasons.  
• Once the white balance has been attained, no further adjustment is  
required provided that the unit is going to be used under the same  
conditions.  
• Up to 100 settings for the camera direction (panning and tilting), zoom,  
focus, iris, gain up and white balance can be registered in the preset  
memories, and called.  
• The number of settings that can be registered and called depends on  
the type of wireless remote control (12 settings) or controller that is  
used for operation.  
• This adjustment is performed to align the black level (pedestal level) of  
a multiple number of cameras.  
• Ask your dealer to perform this adjustment.  
• This adjustment is performed to express the white accurately. Its  
setting also has an effect on the color tones of the entire screen.  
• It must be performed when using the unit for the first time or when the  
unit has not been used for a prolonged period.  
• This adjustment is performed to achieve phase alignment by applying  
external synchronization (genlock) when a multiple number of cameras  
will be used or when the unit will be used in combination with other  
devices.  
• Perform adjustment when the lighting conditions or brightness  
changes.  
• Once the white balance has been attained, no further adjustment is  
required provided that the unit is going to be used under the same  
conditions.  
• Ask your dealer to perform this adjustment.  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Manual shooting  
Manually adjusting the focus  
Manually adjusting the shutter speed  
The lens focus can be adjusted manually.  
The shutter speed can be set using two methods. One is a method that  
specifies the time (where a time such as 1/250 sec. is designated), and  
the other is a method that specifies the frequency (where synchro scan,  
60.15 Hz, etc. is designated).  
When shooting a TV screen or PC monitor screen, the horizontal noise  
generated when the screen is shot can be minimized by adjusting the  
frequency to the screen frequency using synchro scan.  
When performing operations from a wireless  
remote control  
1. Press the <M/FOCUS> button to switch the focus to  
manual adjustment.  
When performing operations from a wireless  
remote control  
2. Press the <F> or <N> button of <FOCUS> to adjust the  
focus.  
When the <F> button is pressed, the focus moves further away (far);  
conversely, when the <N> button is pressed, it moves nearer (near).  
The speed of focusing and other adjustments can be switched to fast  
or slow by pressing the <FAST> or <SLOW> button, respectively.  
Perform the adjustments on the Camera menu.  
For further details, refer to the [Shutter Mode] (→ page 48) and [Step/  
When performing operations from a controller  
3. If necessary, press the <A/FOCUS> button to return the  
focus to the automatic adjustment.  
The procedure is the same as for “When performing the operations  
using the wireless remote control” in “Basic operations” (→pages 37 to 46).  
When performing operations from a controller  
When using a AW-RP50, AW-RP120, or AK-HRP200  
Refer to the operating instructions for the controller.  
When using a AW-RP50, AW-RP120, or AK-HRP200  
Refer to the operating instructions for the controller.  
<NOTE>  
Manually adjusting the gain  
• When the focus is set to manual, the subject may go out of focus  
during panning, tilting and zooming. Therefore, the unit comes with a  
function which compensates for this. (Focus ADJ With PTZ.)  
This function was set to ON at the factory.  
If the function has been set to OFF, either adjust the focus, as  
required, after zooming or set the focus to auto.  
There are two ways to adjust the gain. One way involves using the  
buttons on the wireless remote control or controller; the other way  
involves using the Camera menu or Web setting. The gain can be  
adjusted more precisely using the Camera menu or Web setting.  
For further details, refer to the [Gain] (→page 49, @@).  
<NOTE>  
• When adjusting the gain, the light quantity may change suddenly  
(causing the image output to be subjected to a shock).  
Manually adjusting the iris  
The lens iris can be adjusted manually.  
When performing operations from a wireless  
remote control  
When performing operations from a wireless  
remote control  
1. Press one of the <GAIN> buttons (<OFF>, <LOW> or  
<HI>) .  
1. Press the <M/IRIS> button to switch the iris to manual  
adjustment.  
These buttons enable the gain increase to be selected in three steps.  
[LOW] is used to select 9 dB; [HI] is used to select 18 dB.  
2. Adjust the iris using the <IRIS +> or <IRIS –> button.  
Press the <IRIS +> button to adjust the lens iris in the opening  
direction; conversely, press the <IRIS –> button to adjust the lens iris  
in the closing direction.  
The speed of the iris and other adjustments can be switched to fast or  
slow by pressing the <FAST> or <SLOW> button, respectively.  
2. If necessary, press the [AUTO] button of <Gain> in order  
to return the gain to the automatic adjustment (AGC).  
When performing operations from a controller  
When using a AW-RP50, AW-RP120, or AK-HRP200  
Refer to the operating instructions for the controller.  
3. If necessary, press the <A/IRIS> button to return the iris  
to the automatic adjustment.  
In any case, the maximum gain of the automatic adjustment (AGC) can  
be set by the camera menu or Web setting.  
For further details, refer to the [AGC Max Gain] (→page 49, @@).  
When performing operations from a controller  
When using a AW-RP50, AW-RP120, or AK-HRP200  
Refer to the operating instructions for the controller.  
<NOTE>  
• In the night mode, the iris is set to open as a measure to prevent video  
spying.  
Adjust the brightness at the light source.  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Preset memories  
This unit enables up to 100 settings for the camera direction (panning  
and tilting), zoom, focus, iris, gain and white balance to be registered in  
its preset memories, and called.  
When performing operations from a wireless  
remote control  
However, the number of settings that can be registered and called  
depends on the type of wireless remote control or controller that is used  
for operation.  
Twelve settings (preset No.1 to No.12) can be registered and called  
using the wireless remote control.  
The <1> to <12> buttons correspond to the unit’s preset memories No.1  
to No.12.  
• The focus and iris operating modes (manual and auto settings) are  
neither registered nor recalled. The current focus and iris values are  
registered.  
• The focus and iris values can be recalled only when the manual  
settings are applicable.  
• For the white balance, the current White Balance Mode adjustment  
values are registered. If a preset value is recalled when AWB A  
or AWB B is selected, the adjustment value selected when it was  
registered as a preset will be recalled. The R Gain and B Gain values  
return to 0 in such cases.  
Registering the settings in the preset memories  
1. Display the picture to be shot on the monitor.  
Operate the pan, tilt or zoom buttons to determine the camera angle.  
Adjust the focus, iris, gain and white balance if they need to be  
adjusted.  
2. While holding down the <PRESET> button, press the  
button corresponding to the preset memory number.  
• If a preset memory number with an already registered setting has  
been selected, the existing setting will be erased and replaced with  
the new one.  
<NOTE>  
• When there is a large difference in the environmental temperature  
between the time of registration and the time the setting is called,  
displacement of the preset position may occur.  
• If displacement occurs, perform registration again.  
• When a manual operation is performed for pan, tilt, zoom, focus or iris  
during preset recall, the preset operation for the pan, tilt, zoom, focus  
or iris operation concerned will be aborted.  
Calling the settings of the preset memories  
1. Press the button in which the preset memory setting has  
been registered.  
• If another preset has been recalled during an ongoing preset recall,  
the preset being recalled is aborted, and operation for the preset called  
last is performed instead.  
When performing operations from a controller  
When using a AW-RP50, AW-RP120, or AK-HRP200  
Up to 100 entries can be registered/recalled.  
For details, refer to the operating instructions for the controller.  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
White balance adjustment  
Adjust the ratio between the three primary colors (RGB) to reproduce  
white accurately. If the white balance is out of adjustment, not only will  
white be reproduced poorly, but the color tones of the screen as a whole  
will also be degraded.  
Automatic adjustment (AWB: AWB A or AWB B)  
When performing operations from a wireless  
remote control  
• Perform adjustment when using the unit for the first time or when  
the unit has not been used for a prolonged period.  
• Perform adjustment when the lighting conditions or brightness  
changes.  
1. Shoot a white subject (such as a white wall or  
handkerchief) so that it fills the screen.  
• Do not shoot shiny or very bright objects.  
• Steps 2 through 8 represent the procedure for selecting the [AWB  
A] or [AWB B] memory. They need not be taken if a selection has  
already been made.  
Either AWB (automatic white balance adjustment) which initiates  
automatic adjustment when the <AWB> button on the controller has  
been pressed or ATW (automatic tracking white balance adjustment)  
which constantly adjusts the white balance can be selected for  
adjustment purposes.  
2. Select [Scene1], [Scene2], [Scene3] or [Scene4] as the  
The results of the AWB adjustment can be stored in two memories,  
A and B, when [AWB A] or [AWB B] has been selected for the white  
balance.  
Camera  
Scene  
Scene1  
• Once the white balance values have been adjusted, their setup  
procedure will be completed simply by selecting them using the  
camera menus or web settings, or by pressing the buttons on the  
controller, provided that they are going to be used under the same  
conditions as the ones established when the values were set. There is  
no need to set it again.  
Brightness  
Picture  
Matrix  
• Once a new setting is entered, the previous setting will be erased.  
Return  
Use the two memories to store settings corresponding to different  
shooting conditions.  
3. Press the <4> or <5> button to bring the cursor to  
[Picture].  
4. Press the <M> button.  
The [Picture 1/3] sub-menu is displayed.  
Picture 1/3  
Chroma Level  
0%  
White Balance Mode AWB A  
Color Temperature 3200K  
R Gain  
B Gain  
0
0
Pedestal  
R Pedestal  
B Pedestal  
16  
0
0
Return  
5. Press the <4> or <5> button to bring the cursor to [White  
Balance Mode].  
6. Press the <M> button.  
[White Balance Mode] starts blinking.  
7. Press the <4> or <5> button to change the White  
Balance Mode to be used to [AWB A] or [AWB B], and  
press the <M> button to enter the selection.  
8. Press and hold the <MENU> button for about 2 seconds.  
The camera menu display is exited.  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
White balance adjustment (continued)  
9. Press the <SET> button for 2 seconds.  
The auto white balance adjustment (AWB) and auto black balance  
adjustment (ABB) are performed, and the white balance setting is  
entered.  
• When [On] has been selected as the “OSD Status” (→ page  
58) setting, the “AWB OK” message will appear at the center of  
the screen when the white balance adjustment is completed  
successfully.  
3200K and 5600K presets  
When “3200K” or “5600K” is selected for the white balance, the white  
balance is set using a color temperature of 3200K (equivalent to halogen  
light) or 5600K (equivalent to daylight), respectively.  
This function works when “3200K” or “5600K” is selected instead of  
“AWB A” or “AWB B” by following the steps for “Automatic adjustment” in  
(From the controller, this operation can be performed only using the  
When the black balance adjustment is completed successfully, the  
“ABB OK” message appears at the center of the screen.  
VAR  
When [VAR] is selected for the white balance, you can select a color  
temperature between 2000K to 15000K.  
AWB OK  
<NOTE>  
• The displayed [VAR] value does not guarantee an absolute value. Use  
the value as a reference.  
<NOTE>  
• The black balance is set at the same time.  
When this takes place, the lens is closed and then the adjustment is  
performed so the screen will temporarily turn black.  
When only the auto white balance adjustment (AWB) is to be  
performed, ensure that the [SET] button is pressed or held down for a  
period of time which does not exceed 2 seconds.  
• Adjustment cannot be performed while the color bar is displayed.  
Switch to the camera image by pressing the <MODE> button.  
• When the adjustment has failed, an error message such as “OUT  
RANGE NG”, “HIGH LIGHT NG”, “LOW LIGHT NG” or “ATW NG” is  
displayed.  
When performing operations from a controller  
When using a AW-RP50, AW-RP120, or AK-HRP200  
Refer to the operating instructions for the controller.  
<NOTE>  
• White balance may not be correctly set if the lighting of the object is  
too weak.  
• Since the unit has a built-in memory, the set white balance will  
remain in the memory even if power is turned off. Therefore, it is  
not necessary to reset the white balance if the color temperature of  
those objects remains unchanged. However, it must be reset if the  
color temperature changes, such as when you move from indoors to  
outside, or vice versa.  
Auto tracking white adjustment (ATW)  
When the white balance adjustment is set to “ATW”, the white  
balance continues to be adjusted automatically all the time, and it is  
automatically corrected even when the light source or color temperature  
has changed to produce completely natural pictures.  
This function works when “ATW” is selected instead of “AWB A” or  
“AWB B” by following the steps for “Automatic adjustment” in “White  
balance adjustment” (→ page 32).  
<NOTE>  
• ATW might not function properly when high brightness light (ex.  
fluorescent lamp) beams into a screen.  
• White balance may not be accurately set if there is no white object in  
the scene being shot.  
• The white balance may shift out of adjustment when a different kind of  
light source such as sunlight or fluorescent lighting applies.  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Black balance adjustment  
Adjust the zero levels of the three primary colors (RGB) to reproduce  
black accurately. If the black balance is out of adjustment, not only will  
black be reproduced poorly, but the color tones of the screen as a whole  
will also be degraded.  
When performing operations from a controller  
When using a AW-RP50, AW-RP120, or AK-HRP200  
Refer to the operating instructions for the controller.  
Readjustment of the black balance is not required under normal  
circumstances but is necessary in the following situations.  
• Perform adjustment when using the unit for the first time or when  
the unit has not been used for a prolonged period.  
• Perform adjustment when the ambient temperature changes  
significantly, such as during changes of the season.  
Automatic adjustment  
When performing operations from a wireless  
remote control  
The procedure is identical to that of "Automatic adjustment" (→ page 32)  
The black balance can be configured by performing automatic white  
balance adjustment (AWB) and automatic black balance adjustment  
(ABB).  
• The white balance will also be configured, so be sure to prepare  
the conditions for white balance adjustment before performing the  
procedure.  
• Adjustment cannot be performed while the color bar is displayed.  
Switch to the camera image by pressing the <MODE> button.  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Black level (master pedestal) adjustment  
The black level can be adjusted when using a multiple number of  
cameras including the unit. Ask your dealer to perform this adjustment.  
(Use an oscilloscope or waveform monitor for the adjustment.)  
Adjust the black level in accordance with the units and devices used.  
When performing operations from a controller  
When using a AW-RP50, AW-RP120, or AK-HRP200  
Refer to the operating instructions for the controller.  
When performing operations from a wireless  
remote control  
1. Press the <M/IRIS> button.  
Set the iris to the manual mode.  
2. Press the <IRIS –> button.  
The lens iris is stopped down.  
3. Press the <4> or <5> button to bring the cursor to  
[Picture].  
4. Press the <M> button.  
The [Picture 1/3] sub-menu is displayed.  
Picture 1/3  
Chroma Level  
0%  
White Balance Mode AWB A  
Color Temperature 3200K  
R Gain  
B Gain  
0
0
Pedestal  
R Pedestal  
B Pedestal  
16  
0
0
Return  
5. Press the <4> or <5> button to bring the cursor to  
[Pedestal].  
Picture 1/3  
Chroma Level  
0%  
White Balance Mode AWB A  
Color Temperature 3200K  
R Gain  
B Gain  
0
0
Pedestal  
R Pedestal  
B Pedestal  
16  
0
0
Return  
6. Press the <M> button to start the “Pedestal” value  
blinking.  
7. Press the <4> or <5> button, change the [Pedestal]  
value, and press the <M> button to enter the selection.  
Adjust the value so that it matches the black level.  
The pedestal values can be adjusted finely using the [R Pedestal] and  
[B Pedestal] settings. (→ page @@)  
8. Press and hold the <MENU> button for about 2 seconds.  
The camera menu display is exited.  
9. If necessary, press the [A/IRIS] button to adjust the iris  
automatically.  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Genlock adjustment  
The genlock adjustment is performed to achieve phase alignment by  
applying external synchronization (genlock) when a multiple number of  
cameras will be used or when the unit will be used in combination with  
other devices.  
4. Press the <4> or <5> button to bring the cursor to  
[Genlock], and press the <M> button.  
The [Genlock] sub-menu is displayed.  
Genlock  
This unit supports BBS (Black Burst Sync) and tri-level sync external  
synchronization signals.  
Horizontal Phase  
Horizontal Phase Step  
0
1
Ask your dealer to perform this adjustment.  
(Use a dual-trace oscilloscope for the adjustment.)  
Horizontal phase adjustment  
Observe the waveforms of the external sync signal input (tri-level sync  
signal) and video signal output on the dual-trace oscilloscope, and use  
the wireless remote control or controller to bring the horizontal phase  
into alignment.  
Return  
5. Press the <4> or <5> button to bring the cursor to  
[Horizontal Phase], and press the <M> button.  
External sync signal  
input  
(tri-level sync signal)  
The [Horizontal Phase] value starts blinking.  
6. Press the <4> or <5> button to change the [Horizontal  
Phase] value, adjust the value so that the horizontal  
phase is brought into alignment, and press the <M>  
Video signal output  
button.  
The extent of the phase adjustment can be selected using [Horizontal  
Bring the horizontal  
Phase Step].  
phase into alignment.  
7. Press and hold the <MENU> button for about 2 seconds.  
The camera menu display is exited.  
Example: When the tri-level sync phase is adjusted  
When performing operations from a controller  
When performing operations from a wireless  
remote control  
These operations can be performed using the camera menus by  
following the operation steps in “Basic operations” “Basic operations”  
2. Press the <4> or <5> button to bring the cursor to  
[System].  
Top Menu  
Camera  
Scene: Scene1  
System  
Maintenance  
3. Press the <M> button.  
The [System] screen appears.  
System  
Genlock  
Output  
Others  
Return  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic operations  
Camera menus are displayed on the monitor when the unit’s settings are  
to be selected.  
Only the steps taken using the wireless remote control will be  
described here for the operations conducted to select and set  
the items.  
For details of the operations conducted using the controller,  
substitute “controller” for “wireless remote control” when  
reading the basic operations.  
The monitor is connected to the video signal output connector.  
The basic camera menu operations involve displaying sub-menus from  
the Top Menu items, and selecting settings on the sub-menus.  
Some sub-menus have menu items for performing more detailed  
settings.  
Refer to the operating instructions for the controller.  
The camera menu operations are conducted using the wireless remote  
control.  
If a controller is connected, they can also be conducted using the  
controller.  
<NOTE>  
• Check that your controller is the following version. If the version is  
older, consult your local dealer.  
AW-RP50: Ver 3.00.00 or later  
AW-RP120: Ver 2.00.00 or later  
AK-HRP200: Ver 4.00-00-0.00 or later  
Described below are the basic operations for changing the camera  
menu item settings using the wireless remote control and controller  
(AW-RP50, AW-RP120 or AW-HRP200).  
Wireless remote control and controller operations  
Controller  
Camera menu operation  
Wireless remote control  
AW-RP50  
AW-RP120  
AK-HRP200  
1. Press and hold the <SELECT>  
(camera selection) button for  
about 2 seconds.  
→ The camera number  
in the camera number  
display area blinks.  
2. Press the lit <DATA  
SET> buttons (<UP> and  
<DOWN>).  
Selecting a camera to  
operate  
Press the <CAM1>, <CAM2>, Press the <CAMERA STATUS> Press the <CAMERA STATUS>  
<CAM3>, or <CAM4> button. or <SELECTION> button. or <SELECTION> button.  
→ Press the lit <DATA SET>  
buttons (<UP> and <DOWN>)  
to select the camera number.  
3. Press the <SELECT>  
(camera selection) button.  
→ Control of the selected  
camera is enabled.  
Press and hold the <CAMERA Press and hold the <CAMERA Press and hold the <CHARA/  
Press and hold the <MENU>  
button for about 2 seconds.  
Displaying the Top Menu  
OSD> button for about 2  
seconds.  
OSD> button for about 2  
seconds.  
MENU> button for about 2  
seconds.  
Press the <4>, <5>, <b>, or  
<a> button.  
Selecting items  
Turn the <F1> dial.  
Press the <F1> dial.  
Turn the <F1> dial.  
Turn the <F1> dial.  
Turn the <SELECT> dial.  
Press the <SELECT> dial.  
Displaying sub-menus  
Press the <M> button.  
Returning to the previous Place the cursor on [Return], Place the cursor on [Return],  
Place the cursor on [Return],  
and press the <F1> dial.  
Place the cursor on [Return],  
and press the <SELECT> dial.  
menu  
and press the <M> button.  
and press the <F1> dial.  
Place the cursor on the item  
you want to change, <M>  
button to make the setting  
value blink.  
Change the value using the  
<4>, <5>, <b>, or <a>  
button, and press the <M>  
button to confirm.  
1. Press the <F1> dial to make 1. Press the <F1> dial to make 1. Press the <SELECT> dial to  
the setting value blink. the setting value blink. make the setting value blink.  
2. Turn the <F1> dial to change 2. Turn the <F1> dial to change 2. Turn the <SELECT> dial to  
Changing settings  
the setting value.  
3. Press the <F1> dial to  
confirm the setting value  
(blinking stops).  
the setting value.  
3. Press the <F1> dial to  
confirm the setting value  
(blinking stops).  
change the setting value.  
3. Press the <SELECT> dial  
to confirm the setting value  
(blinking stops).  
Tap the MENU button (hold  
for less than 2 seconds) while  
the setting value is blinking.  
Canceling setting  
changes  
Press and hold the <CAMERA Press and hold the <CAMERA Press and hold the <CHARA/  
Exiting camera menu  
operations  
Press and hold the <MENU>  
button for about 2 seconds.  
OSD> button for about 2  
seconds.  
OSD> button for about 2  
seconds.  
MENU> button for about 2  
seconds.  
<NOTE>  
• Perform the menu operations and exit from the menus using the controller which displayed the Top Menu.  
If a menu operation has been performed or a menu has been exited using another controller, first display the Top Menu and exit from it using one  
controller, and then display the Top Menu and exit from it using the other controller.  
• The procedures used for this unit’s menu operations may differ from the ones used for the convertible cameras and HD integrated cameras which  
have already been released on the market. For details, refer to the Operating Instructions of the camera concerned.  
• The response speed of the camera differs slightly depending on the controller used.  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic operations (continued)  
Operations for controllers that are not supported  
Camera menu operation  
Unsupported controller  
Selecting a camera to operate  
Displaying the Top Menu  
Selecting items  
Displaying sub-menus  
Returning to the previous menu  
Changing settings  
Canceling setting changes  
Exiting camera menu operations  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic operations (continued)  
When performing the operations using the  
wireless remote control  
1. Press the [CAM1], [CAM2], [CAM3] or [CAM4] button to  
select the unit which is to be operated.  
2. Press and hold the <MENU> button for about 2 seconds.  
The Top Menu is displayed.  
3. Press the <4> or <5> button to bring the cursor to the  
item to be selected.  
Each time the <4> or <5> button is pressed, the cursor moves.  
The cursor can be moved in the same way using the <b> or <a>  
buttons.  
4. Press the <M> button.  
The sub-menu of the selected item is displayed.  
(Some sub-menu items have a sub-menu of their own.)  
5. Press the <4> or <5> button to bring the cursor to the  
item to be set.  
Each time the <4> or <5> button is pressed, the cursor moves.  
The cursor can be moved in the same way using the <b> or <a>  
button.  
With the cursor at the “Return” position, press the <M> button to  
return to the previous menu.  
6. Press the <M> button.  
The value of the item to be set starts blinking.  
7. Press the <4> or <5> button to change the setting.  
The setting can be changed in the same way using the <b> or <a>  
button.  
8. Press the <M> button.  
The value of the item to be set is entered, and it stops blinking.  
9. After the setting has been completed, press the [MENU]  
button for 2 seconds.  
The camera menu display is exited.  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic operations (continued)  
Operations on the AW-RP50 Remote Camera Controller  
F1  
F2  
For operating the camera menus.  
CAMERA OSD:  
POWER  
ALARM  
F1  
CAMERA  
OSD  
When this is pressed for 2  
seconds, the selected camera  
menu is displayed, overlapping  
the camera output image. When  
it is pressed for 2 seconds while  
a camera menu is displayed, the  
menu is exited.  
1
2
3
4
5
MENU  
STORE  
PAGE  
GAIN/PED  
R/B GAIN  
R/B PED  
AWB/ABB  
SHUTTER  
F2  
EXIT  
6
7
8
9
10  
DELETE  
DETAIL SCENE/MODE CAMERA  
SETUP  
SYSTEM  
USER1  
USER2  
PRESET MEMORY / MENU  
F1: Turn to move the cursor up and  
down in the camera menu or to  
change setting values. Press to  
move to the next level of a menu  
item or to change a setting value  
at the lowest level.  
1
2
3
4
5
IRIS  
AUTO  
PT ACTIVE  
CAMERA STATUS / SELECTION  
AUTO  
TELE  
ZOOM  
LOW  
HI  
WIDE  
FOCUS/PUSH OAF  
PTZ/FOCUS SPEED  
Selects a camera to be operated.  
Camera menu operation  
Color temperature setting (COLOR TEMP)  
1. Press the appropriate <CAMERA STATUS/SELECTION>  
button to select the unit you want to operate.  
1. Press the <MENU> button on the AW-RP50.  
The <MENU> button lights, and the <PRESET MEMORY/MENU>  
buttons become selectable.  
2. Press and hold the <CAMERA OSD> button on the AW-  
RP50 for about 2 seconds.  
The AW-HE130 camera menu appears on the monitor.  
2. Press the <4 (AWB/ABB)> button in the <PRESET  
MEMORY/MENU> area.  
The button lights, and the [AWB/ABB] menu appears on the LCD  
panel.  
3. Turn the <F1> dial to select an AW-HE130 camera menu  
item or to change a setting value.  
Turn the <F1> dial to move the cursor up and down or to change  
3. Turn the <F1> dial to select [VAR].  
Color temperature configuration is enabled when [VAR] is selected,  
and it is initially set to the color temperature held on the camera.  
To adjust the setting, proceed to the following.  
setting values.  
Press the <F1> dial to move to the next level of a menu item or to  
change a setting value at the lowest level.  
4. Press the <8 (CAMERA)> button in the <PRESET  
MEMORY/MENU> area.  
The button lights, and the [GROUP] menu appears on the LCD panel.  
4. To exit the camera menu, press and hold the <CAMERA  
OSD> for about 2 seconds.  
5. Turn the <F1> dial to select [COLOR TEMP], then press  
the <F1> dial.  
Switching between day and night mode  
The color temperature appears on the bottom right (F2 area) of the  
LCD panel.  
1. Press the <MENU> button on the AW-RP50.  
The <MENU> button lights, and the <PRESET MEMORY/MENU>  
buttons become selectable.  
6. Turn the <F2> dial to select the color temperature, then  
press the <F2> dial.  
2. Press the <9 (SETUP)> button in the <PRESET MEMORY/  
MENU> area.  
The button lights, and the [SETUP] menu appears on the LCD panel.  
3. Turn the <F1> dial to select [FUNCTION], then press the  
<F1> dial.  
4. Turn the <F1> dial to select [OPTION].  
[Off] or [On] appears on the bottom right (F2 area) of the LCD panel.  
5. Turn the <F2> dial to select [Off] or [On], then press the  
<F2> dial.  
[Off]: Day mode  
[On]: Night mode  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic operations (continued)  
Preset speed table setting (PRESET SPEED)  
Optical image stabilization settings (OIS)  
1. Press the <MENU> button on the AW-RP50.  
The <MENU> button lights, and the <PRESET MEMORY/MENU>  
buttons become selectable.  
1. Press the <MENU> button on the AW-RP50.  
The <MENU> button lights, and the <PRESET MEMORY/MENU>  
buttons become selectable.  
2. Press the <9 (SETUP)> button in the <PRESET MEMORY/  
2. Press the <9 (SETUP)> button in the <PRESET MEMORY/  
MENU> area.  
MENU> area.  
The button lights, and the [USER] menu appears on the LCD panel.  
The button lights, and the [USER] menu appears on the LCD panel.  
3. Turn the <F1> dial to select [PRESET], then press the  
<F1> dial.  
3. Turn the <F1> dial to select [FUNCTION], then press the  
<F1> dial.  
4. Turn the <F1> dial to select [PRESET SPEED], then press  
4. Turn the <F1> dial to select [OIS], then press the <F1>  
the <F1> dial.  
dial.  
[Slow] or [Fast] appears on the bottom right (F2 area) of the LCD  
[Off] or [On] appears on the bottom right (F2 area) of the LCD panel.  
panel.  
5. Turn the <F2> dial to select [Off] or [On], then press the  
<F2> dial.  
[Off]: Turn optical image stabilization off.  
5. Turn the <F2> dial to select [Slow] or [Fast], then press  
the <F2> dial.  
[On]: Turn optical image stabilization on.  
Freezing images during preset playback  
(FREEZE DURING)  
Assigning [FREEZE DURING] and [COLOR  
TEMP] to the <USER> buttons  
1. Press the <MENU> button on the AW-RP50.  
The <MENU> button lights, and the <PRESET MEMORY/MENU>  
buttons become selectable.  
You can assign the on/off functions for freezing images during preset  
playback (FREEZE DURING) and color temperature settings (COLOR  
TEMP) to the <USER> buttons.  
2. Press the <9 (SETUP)> button in the <PRESET MEMORY/  
MENU> area.  
The button lights, and the [USER] menu appears on the LCD panel.  
1. Press the <MENU> button on the AW-RP50.  
The <MENU> button lights, and the <PRESET MEMORY/MENU>  
buttons become selectable.  
3. Turn the <F1> dial to select [FUNCTION], then press the  
<F1> dial.  
2. Press the <9 (SETUP)> button in the <PRESET MEMORY/  
MENU> area.  
The button lights, and the [USER] menu appears on the LCD panel.  
4. Turn the <F1> dial to select [FREEZE DURING], then  
press the <F1> dial.  
[Off] or [On] appears on the bottom right (F2 area) of the LCD panel.  
3. Turn the <F1> dial to select [USER1] or [USER2], then  
press the <F1> dial.  
The functions that can be assigned to the <USER> button appear on  
the bottom right (F2 area) of the LCD panel.  
5. Turn the <F2> dial to select [Off] or [On], then press the  
<F2> dial.  
[Off]: Do not freeze the current preset playback images.  
[On]: Freeze the current preset playback images.  
4. Turn the <F2> dial to select [FREEZE DURING] or  
[COLOR TEMP], then press the <F2> dial.  
[FREEZE DURING]: Function that freezes the current preset playback  
images.  
[COLOR TEMP]: Color temperature settings  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic operations (continued)  
Operations on the AW-RP120 Remote Camera Controller  
For operating the camera menus.  
CAMERA OSD:  
When this is pressed for 2  
seconds, the selected camera  
menu is displayed, overlapping  
the camera output image. When  
it is pressed for 2 seconds while  
a camera menu is displayed, the  
menu is exited.  
F1: Turn to move the cursor up and  
down in the camera menu or to  
change setting values. Press to  
move to the next level of a menu  
item or to change a setting value  
at the lowest level.  
Selects a camera to be operated.  
Camera menu operation  
Color temperature setting (COLOR TEMP)  
1. Press the appropriate <CAMERA SELECT/GROUP  
SELECT> button (<1> to <10>) to select the unit you want  
to operate.  
1. Press the <EXIT> button and the <ATW> button of  
<WHITE BALANCE> simultaneously.  
The <A>, <B>, <ATW> buttons of <WHITE BAL> light, and color  
temperature setting mode is enabled.  
The color temperature setting value appears on the LCD screen  
during this time.  
2. Press and hold the <CAMERA OSD> button on the AW-  
RP120 for about 2 seconds.  
The AW-HE130 camera menu appears on the monitor.  
2. Turn the <F1> dial to change the color temperature.  
Press the <A>, <B>, and <ATW> buttons of <WHITE BAL> to return  
to the mode of the selected button.  
The mode will switch from the color temperature mode to the original  
mode after a specific amount of time passes. To configure the color  
temperature setting again, press the <EXIT> button and the <ATW>  
button of <WHITE BALANCE> simultaneously  
3. Turn the <F1> dial to select an AW-HE130 camera menu  
item or to change a setting value.  
Turn the <F1> dial to move the cursor up and down or to change  
setting values.  
Press the <F1> dial to move to the next level of a menu item or to  
change a setting value at the lowest level.  
4. To exit the camera menu, press and hold the <CAMERA  
OSD> for about 2 seconds.  
Preset speed table setting (PRESET SPEED)  
1. Press the <MENU> button on the AW-RP120.  
The <MENU> button lights.  
Switching between day and night mode  
2. Press the FUNCTION menu <29> button.  
The button lights, and the [OPTION] menu appears on the LCD panel.  
1. Press the <MENU> button on the AW-RP120.  
The <MENU> button lights.  
3. Turn the <F1> dial to select [PRESET SPEED], then press  
the <F1> dial.  
[Slow] or [Fast] appears on the bottom right (F2 area) of the LCD  
2. Press the FUNCTION menu <29> button.  
The button lights, and the [OPTION] menu appears on the LCD panel.  
panel.  
3. Turn the <F1> dial to select [FUNCTION], then press the  
<F1> dial.  
4. Turn the <F2> dial to select [Slow] or [Fast], then press  
the <F2> dial.  
4. Turn the <F1> dial to select [OPTION].  
[Off] or [On] appears on the bottom right (F2 area) of the LCD panel.  
5. Turn the <F2> dial to select [Off] or [On], then press the  
<F2> dial.  
Off: Day mode  
On: Night mode  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic operations (continued)  
Freezing images during preset playback  
(FREEZE DURING)  
1. Press the <MENU> button on the AW-RP120.  
The <MENU> button lights.  
2. Press the FUNCTION menu <29> button.  
The button lights, and the [OPTION] menu appears on the LCD panel.  
3. Turn the <F1> dial to select [FREEZE DURING], then  
press the <F1> dial.  
[Off] or [On] appears on the bottom right (F2 area) of the LCD panel.  
4. Turn the <F2> dial to select [Off] or [On], then press the  
<F2> dial.  
[Off]: Do not freeze the current preset playback images.  
[On]: Freeze the current preset playback images.  
Optical image stabilization settings (OIS)  
1. Press the <MENU> button on the AW-RP120.  
The <MENU> button lights.  
2. Press the FUNCTION menu <29> button.  
The [OPTION] menu appears on the LCD panel.  
3. Turn the <F1> dial to select [OIS], then press the <F1>  
dial.  
[Off] or [On] appears on the bottom right (F2 area) of the LCD panel.  
4. Turn the <F2> dial to select [Off] or [On], then press the  
<F2> dial.  
[Off]: Turn optical image stabilization off.  
[On]: Turn optical image stabilization on.  
Assigning [FREEZE DURING] and [COLOR  
TEMP] to the <USER> buttons  
You can assign the on/off functions for freezing images during preset  
playback (FREEZE DURING) and color temperature settings (COLOR  
TEMP) to the <USER> buttons.  
1. Press the <MENU> button on the AW-RP120.  
The <MENU> button lights.  
2. Press the FUNCTION menu <35> button.  
The button lights, and the [USER1] menu appears on the LCD panel.  
3. Turn the <F1> dial to select [USER1] to [USER8], then  
press the <F1> dial.  
The functions that can be assigned to the <USER> button appear on  
the bottom right (F2 area) of the LCD panel.  
4. Turn the <F2> dial to select [FREEZE DURING] or  
[COLOR TEMP], then press the <F2> dial.  
[FREEZE DURING]: Function that freezes the current preset playback  
images.  
[COLOR TEMP]: Color temperature settings  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic operations (continued)  
Operations on the AK-HRP200 Remote Operation Panel  
AUTO  
BLACK  
HEAD  
VF  
POWER  
POWER  
BARS  
TEST  
WHITE  
SET UP  
KNEE  
OFF  
DTL  
OFF  
SHUTTER  
ON  
5600K  
SHIFT  
MATRIX SKINDTL  
STEP/SYNC  
STORE  
SCENE/USER FILE  
SCENE  
SCENE  
USER  
1
2
SCENE  
3
SCENE  
4
1
USER  
2
USER  
3
GAIN  
VR LOCK  
DTL  
FLARE/PED  
UP  
ND  
CC  
SHT  
SYNC  
CAMERA  
M.GAIN  
M.PED  
10-19  
DATA  
SET  
No.  
IRIS  
DISPLAY SELECT  
ND/CC M.GAIN/M.PED SHUTTER  
DOWN  
SET UP  
SELECT  
SHIFT  
+
Selects a camera to be operated.  
1. Press <SELECT> for about 2  
seconds.  
UP+DOWN SAVE/LOAD  
EXIT  
EXECUTE  
CHARA  
IRIS/M.PED LOCK  
IRIS  
M.PED  
PUSH  
PREVIEW  
MENU  
TALLY/CALL  
For operating the camera menus.  
When the <CHARA/MENU> button is  
pressed for 2 seconds, the selected  
camera menu is displayed, overlapping  
the camera output image. When it is  
pressed for 2 seconds while a camera  
menu is displayed, the menu is exited.  
SELECT:  
The camera number in the camera  
number display area blinks.  
2. Press the lit <DATA SET> buttons  
(<UP> and <DOWN>).  
Press the lit <DATA SET> buttons  
(<UP> and <DOWN>) to select the  
camera number.  
3. Press the <SELECT> (camera  
selection) button.  
Control of the selected camera is  
enabled.  
ALM  
EXT  
OPT  
SENSE  
SELECT  
D.EXT  
AUTO  
COARSE  
CLOSE OPEN  
FULL  
CLOSE  
Turn to move the cursor up and  
down in the camera menu or to  
change setting values. Press to  
move to the next level of a menu  
item or to change a setting value at  
the lowest level.  
Camera menu operation  
1. Press and hold the <CHARA/MENU> button on the AK-  
HRP200 for about 2 seconds.  
The AW-HE130 camera menu appears on the monitor.  
2. Turn the <SELECT> dial to select an AW-HE130 camera  
menu item or to change a setting value.  
Turn the <SELECT> dial to move the cursor up and down or to  
change setting values.  
Press the <SELECT> dial to move to the next level of a menu item or  
to change a setting value at the lowest level.  
3. To exit the camera menu, press and hold the <CHARA/  
MENU> for about 2 seconds.  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic operations (continued)  
The following operations can be performed from the AK-HRP200 Remote Operation Panel.  
For details on operations, refer to the AK-HRP200 Operating Instructions <Basics>.  
Control/display component  
Camera power switch  
Label  
HE130  
Supported  
Remarks  
1
2
HEAD POWER  
VF POWER  
VF power switch  
Supported with some  
restrictions  
3
4
5
Color bar signal output switch  
BARS/TEST  
AUTO WHITE  
AUTO BLACK  
Does not transition to TEST_ON.  
Running state after accepting AWB/ABB  
lasts at least 2 sec.  
Auto white balance switch  
Auto black balance switch  
Supported  
Supported  
Running state after accepting AWB/ABB  
lasts at least 2 sec.  
6
7
Auto setup switch  
5600 k switch  
AUTO SETUP  
5600k  
8
Matrix switch  
MATRIX  
9
Skin color detail switch  
Knee OFF switch  
Detail OFF switch  
SKIN DTL ON  
KNEE OFF  
DTL OFF  
10  
11  
Supported  
Shutter ON/OFF switch,  
STEP/SYNC switch  
Supported with some  
restrictions  
The shutter value is fixed during transition  
from SYNC (see No. 36).  
12  
SHUTTER ON STEP/SYNC  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
Scene / user file selection switch  
Scene / user file 1 switch  
Scene / user file 2 switch  
Scene / user file 3 switch  
Scene file 4 switch  
SCENE/USER FILE SHIFT  
SCENE/USER FILE1  
SCENE/USER FILE2  
SCENE/USER FILE3  
SCENE FILE 4  
Supported  
Supported  
Supported  
Supported  
Scene / user file storage switch  
Volume lock switch  
SCENE/USER FILE STORE  
VOL LOCK  
Supported  
Supported  
Supported  
PED: Supported  
FLR: ―  
R gain volume  
GAIN R  
B gain volume  
GAIN B  
22  
23  
R flare / pedestal volume  
B flare / pedestal volume  
FLARE/PED  
FLARE/PED  
PED: Supported  
FLR: ―  
24  
25  
26  
27  
DTL volume  
DTL  
DATA SET UP  
DATA SET DOWN  
None  
Data set (up)  
Supported  
Supported  
Supported  
Data set (down)  
Adjustment value display  
Supported with some  
restrictions  
Operation is supported, but the IRIS  
value cannot be displayed.  
28  
IRIS display  
IRIS  
DISPLAY SELECT  
ND/CC  
Used for ZOOM / FOCUS MODE  
switching.  
Supported with some  
restrictions  
29  
ND/CC display selection switch  
Used for ND / ZOOM / FOCUS MODE  
switching.  
30  
31  
ND display  
ND  
CC  
Supported  
CC display  
M.GAIN / M.PED display  
Selection switch  
M.GAIN display  
M.PED display  
SHUTTER display selection  
Switch  
DISPLAY SELECT  
M.GAIN/M.PED  
M.GAIN  
32  
Supported  
33  
Supported  
Supported  
34  
M.PED  
DISPLAY SELECT  
SHUTTER  
35  
Supported  
The shutter value is fixed during transition  
from SYNC.  
• For 59.94p, 59.94i: 1/100  
• For 29.97p: 1/120  
• For 23.98p: 1/120  
• For 50p, 50i: 1/120  
• For 25p: 1/120  
Supported with some  
restrictions  
36  
37  
SHUTTER display  
SHT  
Supported with some  
restrictions  
The display for 7SEG will be "----" during  
SYNC.  
SYNC display  
SYNC  
38  
39  
40  
Camera number display  
Camera number tens display  
Camera selection switch  
CAM No.  
10-19  
Supported  
Supported  
Supported  
CAM SEL  
CHARA  
MENU ON/OFF  
41  
Menu / character switch  
Supported  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic operations (continued)  
Control/display component  
Label  
HE130  
Remarks  
Only enabled during MENU ON.  
When ZOOM is selected, FOCUS  
adjustment is possible on the selection  
dial.  
When FOCUS is selected, ZOOM  
adjustment is possible on the selection  
dial.  
42  
43  
Rotary selection switch  
SELECT  
Supported  
Supported with some  
restrictions  
Red/green tally display, call switch  
TALLY/CALL  
CALL is disabled.  
44  
45  
46  
Alarm display  
ALARM  
OPT  
Optical alarm display  
Iris / master pedestal lock  
IRIS/M.PED LOCK  
Supported  
Supported with some  
restrictions  
The IRIS value cannot be displayed for  
7SEG.  
47  
Iris lever  
IRIS (↑↓)  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
Master pedestal volume  
Preview switch  
M.PED (← →)  
PUSH PREVIEW  
FEDER FULL  
AUTO  
Supported  
Feder full switch  
Auto iris switch  
Supported  
Iris close switch  
CLOSE  
Supported with some  
restrictions  
Used for ZOOM/FOCUS SPEED  
adjustment.  
53  
Sense volume  
SENSE  
54  
55  
56  
57  
Coarse volume  
COARSE  
EXT  
Lens extender display  
Digital extender display  
SD card access display  
D.EXT  
SD CARD  
Supported  
When ZOOM is selected, FOCUS  
adjustment is possible on the selection  
dial.  
63  
Zoom  
Focus  
Supported  
Supported  
When ZOOM is selected, FOCUS  
adjustment is possible on the selection  
dial.  
64  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Camera menu items  
Setting the camera menu items  
Top Menu screen  
Camera menus are displayed on the monitor when the unit’s settings are  
to be selected.  
Top Menu  
The monitor is connected to the video signal output connector.  
The basic camera menu operations involve displaying sub-menus from  
the Top Menu items, and selecting settings on the sub-menus.  
Some sub-menus have menu items for performing more detailed  
settings.  
Camera  
System  
Maintenance  
Scene: Scene1  
For details on the “Basic operations” to display the camera menus and  
change the items using the wireless remote control or controller (AW-  
RP50, AW-RP120, AK-HRP200), refer to pages 37 to 46.  
The “ ” and “ ” marks in the menu titles indicate the hierarchical level  
of the menu currently displayed.  
For instance, “  
whereas “  
that the second hierarchical level is now displayed.  
” indicates the first hierarchical level  
and “ ” indicate  
Camera  
Select this to open the camera menu relating to the camera images.  
Menu items accompanied by a “ ” mark indicate data which is stored  
on a scene by scene basis; menu items accompanied by a “ ” mark  
indicate data which is stored together for one camera regardless of the  
scenes.  
System  
Select this to display the System menu used to adjust the genlock  
(external synchronization) phase or establish the camera output image  
settings.  
For details on factory default settings, see "Camera menu item table" (→  
page @@).  
Maintenance  
Select this to display the Maintenance menu used to check the  
camera’s firmware version or initialize its settings.  
<NOTE>  
• The Top Menu does not have a “Return” setting.  
To close the menu screen, use the controller to perform the operation  
to close the menu screen. For further details, refer to page @@ to  
@@.  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Camera menu items (continued)  
Camera screen  
Brightness 1/2 screen  
This menu is used for the camera image settings.  
This menu item is selected to set the brightness of the pictures.  
Camera  
Brightness 1/2  
Scene  
Scene1  
Picture Level  
Iris Mode  
Shutter Mode  
Step/Synchro  
Gain  
0
Auto  
Off  
----  
0dB  
Brightness  
Picture  
Matrix  
AGC Max Gain  
Frame Mix  
ND Filter  
18dB  
----  
Through  
Return  
Return  
Scene [Scene1, Scene2, Scene3, Scene4]  
Selected here is the shooting mode that matches the shooting  
situation.  
Picture Level [–50 to +50]  
This menu item is selected to set the target picture level for automatic  
exposure compensation.  
Select the mode which best suits the prevailing shooting conditions  
and the user’s preferences.  
Its setting takes effect when [Auto] or [ELC] has been selected as  
the setting for any of the following automatic exposure compensation  
functions.  
• When [Iris Mode] is set to [Auto]  
• When [Shutter Mode] is set to [ELC]  
Scene1, Scene2, Scene3, Scene4:  
In these modes, the detailed settings and adjustments are  
established manually to match the prevailing shooting conditions  
and the user’s preferences.  
• When [Gain] is set to [Auto]  
Iris Mode [Manual, Auto]  
This menu item is used to select whether the iris is to be adjusted  
automatically or manually.  
Manual: The iris is adjusted manually.  
Brightness  
This menu item displays the Brightness screen on which to set the  
brightness of the images.  
Two screens (Brightness 1/2, Brightness 2/2) are provided for the  
brightness adjustment menu.  
Auto:  
Auto exposure compensation is performed so that the  
target level which was set using [Picture Level] is reached.  
Picture  
Shutter Mode [Off, Step, Synchro, ELC]  
Select for camera shutter speed.  
This menu item displays the Picture screen on which to adjust the  
picture quality.  
Three screens (Picture 1/3, Picture 2/3 and Picture 3/3) are provided  
for the picture quality adjustment menu.  
Off:  
The shutter is set to OFF.  
Step:  
The step shutter is set (the steps can be changed).  
Synchro: The synchro shutter is set (the setting can be changed  
continuously).  
Matrix  
ELC:  
The electronic shutter is controlled and the light quantity is  
adjusted automatically.  
This menu item displays the Matrix screen on which to set the color  
matrix.  
Five screens (Matrix 1/4, Matrix 2/4, Matrix 3/4 and Matrix 4/4, Matrix  
5/5) are provided for the color matrix adjustment menu.  
Step/Synchro  
This is used to adjust the shutter speed in the mode which was  
selected as the [Shutter Mode] setting.  
When a higher shutter speed is selected, fast-moving subjects do not  
become blurred easily but the images will be darker.  
Return  
Return to the previous menu level.  
The shutter speeds that can be set are listed below.  
[When 59.94 Hz has been set as the unit’s frequency]  
When [Step] is selected as the  
[Shutter Mode]  
When [Synchro] is selected as  
the [Shutter Mode]  
• 59.94p / 59.94i mode  
1/100, 1/120, 1/250, 1/500,  
1/1000, 1/2000, 1/4000, 1/10000  
• 29.97p mode  
1/30, 1/60, 1/120, 1/250, 1/500,  
1/1000, 1/2000, 1/4000, 1/10000  
• 23.98p mode  
60.15 Hz to 642.21 Hz  
(255 steps)  
1/24, 1/60, 1/120, 1/250, 1/500,  
1/1000, 1/2000, 1/4000, 1/10000  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Camera menu items (continued)  
[When 50 Hz has been set as the unit’s frequency]  
Brightness 2/2 screen  
When [Step] is selected as the  
[Shutter Mode]  
When [Synchro] is selected as  
the [Shutter Mode]  
Brightness 2/2  
Day/Night  
50p / 50i mode  
1/60, 1/120, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000,  
1/2000, 1/4000, 1/10000  
25p mode  
Day  
50.15 Hz to 535.71 Hz  
(255 steps)  
1/25, 1/60, 1/120, 1/250, 1/500,  
1/1000, 1/2000, 1/4000, 1/10000  
<NOTE>  
• When [Shutter Mode] is set to [OFF] in 29.97P, 23.98P, or 25P  
mode, the shutter speed is set to [1/50].  
Return  
Gain [Auto, 0dB to 36dB]  
The image gain is adjusted here.  
In locations which are too dark, adjust the gain upward; conversely, in  
locations which are too bright, adjust it downward.  
When [Auto] is set, the light quantity is adjusted automatically.  
The noise increases when the gain is increased.  
Day/Night [Day, Night]  
Switch between standard shooting and night-vision shooting (shooting  
with infrared light).  
Day: Standard shooting (day mode)  
Night: Night-vision shooting (night mode)  
AGC Max Gain [6dB, 12dB, 18dB]  
When [Auto] is selected as the [Gain] setting, the maximum gain-up  
amount can be set.  
<NOTE>  
• In night mode, video output will be in black and white. In addition, the  
iris will be forcibly opened.  
• White balance adjustment is not possible in night mode.  
Frame Mix [Off, 6dB, 12dB, 18dB, 24dB]  
Select for frame addition (gain-up using sensor storage) amount.  
When frame addition is performed, it will appear as if the images are  
missing some frames.  
This cannot be configured when the format is 1080/29.97p,  
1080/23.98p, 1080/29.97PsF, 1080/23.98PsF, 1080/25p, or  
1080/25PsF.  
Return  
Return to the previous menu level.  
The auto exposure correction and auto focus functions will be  
disabled when [Frame Mix] is set to [18dB] or [24dB]. (Only manual  
operation will be possible.)  
<NOTE>  
• Under discharge tube illumination, such as fluorescent and mercury-  
vapor lights, the brightness may change synchronously, colors may  
change, and horizontal stripes may flow up and down the image.  
In such cases, we recommend setting the electronic shutter speed  
to 1/100 in regions with 50 Hz power supply frequency, and to OFF  
in regions with 60 Hz power supply frequency.  
ND Filter [Through, 1/8, 1/64]  
Set the transmittance of the lens' built-in ND (neutral density) filter.  
The filter switches when the setting is fixed.  
Return  
Return to the previous menu level.  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Camera menu items (continued)  
Picture 1/3 screen  
Picture 1/3  
Picture 2/3 screen  
Picture 2/3  
Chroma Level  
White Balance Mode AWB A  
Color Temperature 3200K  
R Gain  
B Gain  
Pedestal  
R Pedestal  
B Pedestal  
0%  
Detail  
On  
31  
0
0
1
16  
HD  
Master Detail  
V Detail Level  
Detail Band  
Noise Suppress  
FleshTone NoiseSUP.  
Gamma Type  
Gamma  
0
0
16  
0
0
0.45  
Off  
DRS  
Return  
Return  
Chroma Level [OFF, -99% to 40%]  
Detail [Off, On]  
Set here is the color intensity (chroma level) of the images.  
This enables the B pedestal to be adjusted.  
White Balance Mode  
Master Detail [0 to 62]  
Adjust the contour correction level (master).  
[ATW, AWB A, AWB B, 3200K, 5600K, VAR]  
Set the white balance mode.  
Select the mode when the coloring is not natural because of the  
nature of the light source or other factors.  
V Detail Level [-7 to +7]  
Adjust the vertical contour correction level.  
If the white color serving as the reference can be recognized, subjects  
can be shot with natural coloring.  
Detail Band [-7 to +7]  
This is selected to set the boost frequency for Detail.  
ATW:  
In this mode, the white balance is compensated for  
automatically, even if changes occur in the light source  
or color temperature, by a process of continuous and  
automatic adjustment.  
-7: Low frequency  
to  
+7: High frequency  
AWB A, AWB B:  
When [AWB A] or [AWB B] is selected and the white  
When a high frequency is selected, the detail effect is added to  
subjects with more definition.  
balance is executed, the adjustment results obtained are  
stored in the memory selected. When [AWB A] or [AWB B]  
is then selected, the white balance stored in the selected  
memory can be recalled.  
Noise Suppress [0 to 60]  
This is selected to reduce the screen noise which is generated by the  
detail effect.  
3200K: This is the white balance mode which is ideal when a  
3200K halogen light is used as the light source.  
5600K: This is the white balance mode which is ideal when 5600K  
sunlight or fluorescent lighting is used as the light source.  
The higher the settings, the more the noise is reduced.  
FleshTone NoiseSUP. [0 to 31]  
This function is selected to make the skin of the subjects to be shot  
appear to be smoother and more attractive.  
VAR:  
You can specify a color temperature between 2000K to  
15000K.  
When “High” is selected, the effect is enhanced.  
Color Temperature [2000K to 15000K]  
You can specify a color temperature between 2000K to 15000K.  
Its setting takes effect when [Var] has been selected as the [White  
Balance Mode] setting.  
Gamma Type  
[HD, SD, FILMLIKE1, FILMLIKE2, FILMLIKE3]  
Select the type of gamma curve.  
HD:  
SD:  
HD (High Definition) video gamma characteristic.  
Gain in darks areas is higher than in HD gamma.  
R Gain [–150 to +150]  
This enables the R gain to be adjusted.  
FILMLIKE1: Characteristic capable of reproducing better gradation in  
highlights than HD gamma.  
Its setting takes effect when [AWB A], [AWB B] or [Var] has been  
selected as the [White Balance Mode] setting.  
FILMLIKE2: Characteristic capable of reproducing better gradation in  
highlights than [FILMLIKE1].  
FILMLIKE3: Characteristic capable of reproducing better gradation in  
highlights than [FILMLIKE2].  
B Gain [–150 to +150]  
This enables the B gain to be adjusted.  
Its setting takes effect when [AWB A], [AWB B] or [Var] has been  
selected as the [White Balance Mode] setting.  
Gamma [0.30 to 0.75]  
Adjust the gamma correction level.  
Pedestal [–150 to +150]  
Specifying smaller values results in a gentler gamma curve for the  
slope of low-brightness areas and sharper contrast.  
Specifying larger values results in an expanded gradient for dark  
areas and produces brighter images. The gamma curve for low-  
brightness areas will be steeper, and contrast will be softer.  
This item is used to adjust the black level (adjust the pedestal).  
These parts become darker when a negative setting is selected and,  
conversely, lighter when a positive setting is selected.  
R Pedestal [–100 to +100]  
This enables the R pedestal to be adjusted.  
DRS [Off, Low, Mid, High]  
Set the DRS function which performs correction when video with high  
light/dark contrast is displayed.  
You can select from a [Low], [Mid], or [High] effect level.  
B Pedestal [–100 to +100]  
This enables the B pedestal to be adjusted.  
Return  
Return  
Return to the previous menu level.  
Return to the previous menu level.  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Camera menu items (continued)  
Picture 3/3 screen  
Matrix 1/5 screen  
Picture 3/3  
Matrix 1/5  
Matrix Type  
Knee Mode  
Knee Point  
Knee Slope  
White Clip  
White Clip Level  
DNR  
Auto  
93.0%  
85  
On  
109%  
Off  
Normal  
Return  
Return  
Knee Mode [Off, Auto, Manual]  
Matrix Type [Normal, EBU, NTSC, User]  
Set the operating mode for gradation compression (knee).  
Select the type of color matrix.  
Normal  
Knee Point [70.0% to 107.0%]  
Set the compression level (knee point) position for high-brightness  
video signals.  
This item is used to load the preset color matrix data  
and compensate for the saturation and color phase.  
EBU  
NTSC  
User  
This is only enabled when [Knee Mode] is set to [Manual].  
On the [Matrix 2/5 screen], the [Linear Matrix] value  
can be adjusted by the user.  
Knee Slope [0 to 99]  
Set the knee slope.  
This is only enabled when [Knee Mode] is set to [Manual].  
<NOTE>  
On the [Matrix 3/5 screen], [Matrix 4/5 screen] or  
[Matrix 5/5 screen], the [Color Correction] value can  
be adjusted by the user.  
• When [DRS] is enabled, the knee setting is disabled.  
Return  
Return to the previous menu level.  
White Clip [Off, On]  
Turn the white clip function off/on.  
White Clip Level [90% to 109%]  
Set the white clip level.  
This is only enabled when [White Clip] is set to [On].  
<NOTE>  
• When [Knee Mode] is set to [Auto] and the white clip value is  
changed, the knee value will also change.  
DNR [Off, Low, High]  
Set the digital noise reduction level for outputting bright, clear images  
without noise, even at night and low-light conditions.  
When [Low] or [High] is selected, noise can be eliminated.  
However, image lag may increase.  
Return  
Return to the previous menu level.  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Camera menu items (continued)  
Matrix 2/5 screen  
Matrix 3/5 screen  
Matrix 2/5  
Matrix 3/5  
[Color Correction 1/3]  
[Linear Matrix]  
R-G  
R-B  
G-R  
G-B  
B-R  
B-G  
0
0
0
0
0
0
Saturation  
Phase  
B_Mg  
Mg  
Mg_R  
Mg_R_R  
R
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R_R_YI  
Return  
Return  
Linear Matrix  
Color Correction 1/3  
This can be set when “User” has been selected as the “Matrix Type”  
This can be set when [User] has been selected as the [Matrix Type]  
setting.  
setting.  
R-G [–63 to +63]  
This is selected to adjust the colors in the R-G axis direction.  
B_Mg Saturation [B_Mg Saturation: –63 to +63]  
This is selected to increase or decrease the colors between blue and  
magenta.  
R-B [–63 to +63]  
This is selected to adjust the colors in the R-B axis direction.  
B_Mg Phase [B_Mg Phase: –63 to +63]  
This is selected to vary the hue (color phase) of the colors between  
blue and magenta.  
G-R [–63 to +63]  
This is selected to adjust the colors in the G-R axis direction.  
Mg Saturation [Mg Saturation: –63 to +63]  
This is selected to increase or decrease the saturation for magenta.  
G-B [–63 to +63]  
This is selected to adjust the colors in the G-B axis direction.  
Mg Phase [Mg Phase: –63 to +63]  
This is selected to vary the hue (color phase) of the magenta.  
B-R [–63 to +63]  
This is selected to adjust the colors in the B-R axis direction.  
Mg_R Saturation [Mg_R Saturation: –63 to +63]  
This is selected to increase or decrease the saturation for colors  
between magenta and red.  
B-G [–63 to +63]  
This is selected to adjust the colors in the B-G axis direction.  
Mg_R Phase [Mg_R Phase: –63 to +63]  
This is selected to vary the hue (color phase) of the colors between  
magenta and red.  
Return  
Return to the previous menu level.  
Mg_R_R Saturation [Mg_R_R Saturation: –63 to +63]  
This is selected to increase or decrease the saturation for colors with  
a 1:3 magenta to red ratio.  
Mg_R_R Phase [Mg_R_R Phase: –63 to +63]  
This is selected to vary the hue (color phase) of the colors with a 1:3  
magenta to red ratio.  
R Saturation [R Saturation: –63 to +63]  
This is selected to increase or decrease the saturation for red.  
R Phase [R Phase: –63 to +63]  
This is selected to vary the hue (color phase) of the red.  
R_R_YI Saturation [R_R_YI Saturation: –63 to +63]  
This is selected to increase or decrease the saturation for colors with  
a 3:1 red to yellow ratio.  
R_R_YI Phase [R_R_YI Phase: –63 to +63]  
This is selected to vary the hue (color phase) of the colors with a 3:1  
red to yellow ratio.  
Return  
Return to the previous menu level.  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Camera menu items (continued)  
Matrix 4/5 screen  
Matrix 5/5 screen  
Matrix 4/5  
[Color Correction 2/3]  
Matrix 5/5  
[Color Correction 3/3]  
Saturation  
0
Phase  
Saturation  
Phase  
R_Yl  
0
0
0
0
0
0
Cy  
Cy_B  
B
0
0
0
0
0
0
R_Yl_Yl  
Yl  
0
0
0
0
0
Yl_G  
G
G_Cy  
Return  
Return  
Color Correction 2/3  
Color Correction 3/3  
This can be set when [User] has been selected as the [Matrix Type]  
This can be set when [User] has been selected as the [Matrix Type]  
setting.  
setting.  
R_YI Saturation [R_YI Saturation: –63 to +63]  
This is selected to increase or decrease the saturation for colors  
between red and yellow.  
Cy Saturation [Cy Saturation: –63 to +63]  
This is selected to increase or decrease the saturation for magenta.  
Cy Phase [Cy Phase: –63 to +63]  
R_Yl Phase [R_Yl Phase: –63 to +63]  
This is selected to vary the hue (color phase) of the colors between  
red and yellow.  
This is selected to vary the hue (color phase) of the cyan.  
Cy_B Saturation [Cy_B Saturation: –63 to +63]  
This is selected to increase or decrease the saturation for colors  
between cyan and blue.  
R_ YI _YI Saturation. [R_ YI _YI Saturation: –63 to +63]  
This is selected to increase or decrease the saturation for colors with  
a 1:3 red to yellow ratio.  
Cy_B Phase [Cy_B Phase: –63 to +63]  
This is selected to vary the hue (color phase) of the colors between  
cyan and blue.  
R_YI_YI Phase [R_YI_YI Phase: –63 to +63]  
This is selected to vary the hue (color phase) of the colors with a 1:3  
red to yellow ratio.  
B Saturation [B Saturation: –63 to +63]  
This is selected to increase or decrease the saturation for blue.  
YI Saturation [YI Saturation: –63 to +63  
This is selected to increase or decrease the saturation for yellow.  
]
B Phase [B Phase: –63 to +63]  
This is selected to vary the hue (color phase) of the blue.  
Yl Phase [Yl Phase: –63 to +63]  
This is selected to vary the hue (color phase) of the yellow.  
Return  
Return to the previous menu level.  
YI_G Saturation [YI_G Saturation: –63 to +63]  
This is selected to increase or decrease the saturation for colors  
between yellow and green.  
Yl_G Phase [Yl_G Phase: –63 to +63]  
This is selected to vary the hue (color phase) of the colors between  
yellow and green.  
G Saturation [G Saturation: –63 to +63]  
This is selected to increase or decrease the saturation for green.  
G Phase [G Phase: –63 to +63]  
This is selected to vary the hue (color phase) of the green.  
G_Cy Saturation [G_Cy Saturation: –63 to +63]  
This is selected to increase or decrease the saturation for colors  
between green and cyan.  
G_Cy Phase [G_Cy Phase: –63 to +63]  
This is selected to vary the hue (color phase) of the colors between  
green and cyan.  
Return  
Return to the previous menu level.  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Camera menu items (continued)  
System screen  
Genlock screen  
This menu has items that relate to the genlock phase adjustment and  
camera’s output image settings.  
Genlock  
System  
Horizontal Phase  
Horizontal Phase Step  
0
1
Genlock  
Output  
Others  
Return  
Return  
Horizontal Phase [–206 to +49]  
This is used to adjust the horizontal phase during genlock.  
Genlock  
This displays the [Genlock] screen on which to perform the phase  
adjustments.  
Horizontal Phase Step [1 to 10]  
This is selected to set the amount by which the [Horizontal Phase]  
setting is to be adjusted.  
Output  
This displays the [Output] screen on which to select the camera’s  
output image settings.  
Return  
Return to the previous menu level.  
Others  
<NOTE>  
This displays the [Other] screen on which to select the settings for  
the installation status of the camera’s pan-tilt head unit and operating  
speed as well as the settings relating to the other functions.  
• The horizontal phases of the HD and SD signals cannot be adjusted  
separately.  
Neither is it possible to adjust the chroma phase of the VIDEO OUT  
signals. The free run setting is used.  
Return  
Return to the previous menu level.  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Camera menu items (continued)  
Frequency [59.94Hz, 50Hz]  
This item is selected to switch the frame frequency.  
Output screen  
• When the frequency is switched, [Format] is set as follows.  
Output  
59.94Hz  
1080/59.94p  
1080/29.97p  
1080/23.98p  
1080/59.94i  
1080/29.97PsF  
1080/23.98PsF  
720/59.94p  
50Hz  
Format  
Down CONV. Mode  
Frequency  
1080/59.94i  
1080/50p  
1080/25p  
1080/25p  
1080/50i  
Squeeze  
59.94Hz  
Off  
Color Bars Setup  
1080/25PsF  
1080/25PsF  
720/50p  
480/59.94p(i)  
480/59.94p(i)  
Return  
• For details on how to change the frequency, refer to “Changing the  
Format  
[(For 59.94Hz) 1080/59.94p, 1080/29.97p, 1080/23.98p,  
1080/59.94i, 1080/29.97PsF, 1080/23.98PsF, 720/59.94p,  
480/59.94p(i), (For 50Hz) 1080/50p, 1080/25p, 1080/50i,  
Color Bars Setup [Off, On]  
This is only enabled when [Frequency] is set to [59.94Hz].  
Select the color bar setup level (Off: 0.0IRE, On: 7.5IRE) for the  
VIDEO OUT signal.  
1080/25PsF, 720/50p, 576/50p(i)]  
The video format is changed on this screen.  
For details on how to change the format, refer to “Changing the  
Return  
Return to the previous menu level.  
In the case of the 480/59.94p(i) or 576/50p(i) format, the P signal is  
output to the HDMI connector, and the I signal is output to the SDI  
output and analog component output connectors.  
Down CONV. Mode  
[Squeeze, SideCut, LetterBox]  
The down-conversion mode is selected here.  
This setting is used when the aspect  
ratio of the monitor is to be set to 16:9.  
If the monitor is set to the 4:3 aspect  
ratio, the images will be squeezed in the  
width direction and extended in the height  
direction.  
Squeeze  
This setting is used when the aspect ratio  
of the monitor is to be set to 4:3. With the  
vertical height serving as the reference,  
the parts which extend beyond this at the  
two sides are cropped changing the view  
of the angle.  
SideCut  
This setting is used when the aspect ratio  
of the monitor is to be set to 4:3. With the  
horizontal width serving as the reference,  
black bands are added at the top and  
bottom changing the view of the angle.  
LetterBox  
• The mode switches when the setting is fixed.  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Camera menu items (continued)  
Changing the format  
Changing the frequency  
When the currently selected format is changed in the [Output] screen,  
the pre-format-change confirmation screen appears.  
When the currently selected frequency is changed in the [Output]  
screen, the pre-frequency-change confirmation screen appears.  
Pre-format-change confirmation screen  
Pre-frequency-change confirmation screen  
Format  
Frequency  
Do you want to set  
Format(1080/59.94p)?  
Do you want to set  
Frequency(59.94Hz)?  
CANCEL  
O.K.  
CANCEL  
O.K.  
• The format to be set is displayed within the parentheses on the  
screen.  
• The frequency to be set is displayed within the parentheses on the  
screen.  
• When you move the cursor to [O.K.] on the pre-format-change  
confirmation screen and confirm, the Format Set screen appears  
for a few seconds, and then the post-format-change confirmation  
screen appears.  
• When you move the cursor to [O.K.] on the pre-frequency-change  
confirmation screen and confirm, the Frequency Set screen appears  
for a few seconds, and then the post-frequency-change confirmation  
screen appears.  
• The unit automatically restarts after the Frequency Set screen  
appears.  
Format Set screen  
Format  
Frequency Set screen  
Frequency  
Format(1080/59.94p)  
Set  
Frequency(59.94Hz)  
Set  
• When you switch from an HD format to an SD format or vice versa,  
the unit automatically restarts after the Format Set screen appears,  
and the post-format-change confirmation screen does not appear.  
Post-format-change confirmation screen  
Format  
Are you O.K.?  
No  
Yes  
• If you move the cursor to [Yes] and confirm, the display returns to  
the [Output] screen in the post-change format.  
• If you move the cursor to [No] and confirm, the display returns to the  
[Output] screen in the pre-change format.  
• If an external sync signal that does not match the changed format is  
input, the image will be distorted.  
Change the external sync signal, or perform internal  
synchronization.  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Camera menu items (continued)  
Other 1/4 screen  
Other 2/4 screen  
Others 1/4  
Others 2/4  
Focus Mode  
Focus ADJ With PTZ. ----  
Digital Zoom  
Max Digital Zoom  
Digital Extender  
OIS  
Auto  
Disable  
----  
Off  
Off  
Freeze During Preset Off  
Tally  
Tally Brightness  
Enable  
Low  
Speed With Zoom POS.  
Return  
On  
Return  
Install Position [Desktop, Hanging]  
Focus Mode [Auto, Manual]  
“Desktop” or “Hanging” is selected here as the method used to install  
Select auto or manual mode for the focus adjustment function.  
the unit.  
Auto:Always adjust focus automatically.  
Desktop: Stand-alone installation  
Manual: Adjust focus manually.  
Hanging: Suspended installation  
• When [Hanging] has been selected, the top, bottom, left and right  
of the images will be reversed, and up/down/left/right control for  
panning and tilting will also be reversed.  
Focus ADJ With PTZ. [Off, On]  
“Off” or “On” is set here for the function which compensates for out-of-  
focusing when it occurs during panning, tilting or zooming operations.  
When [Off] is set, adjust the focus as required after zooming or set  
the focus to the auto mode.  
Smart Picture Flip [Off, Auto]  
When the tilt becomes the angle set for [Flip Detect Angle], the image  
will be flipped in the vertical direction automatically.  
Off: The picture is not turned upside down (flipped).  
Auto:The picture is automatically turned upside down (flipped).  
This item can be selected only when [Manual] has been selected as  
the [Focus Mode] setting.  
Digital Zoom [Disable, Enable]  
“Enable” or “Disable” is set here for the digital zoom function.  
If zooming is performed toward the Tele end beyond the maximum  
position when [Enable] has been selected, the digital zoom can be  
operated continuously. Zooming will stop temporarily at the position  
where the optical zoom and digital zoom are switched so after it has  
stopped at this position, proceed with zooming again.  
When the setting is changed to [Disable] while already in the digital  
zoom region, the zoom will automatically move to the maximum  
position of the optical zoom.  
Flip Detect Angle [60° to 120°]  
Set the tilt angle at which the image will be flipped in the vertical  
direction automatically when [Smart Picture Flip] is set to [Auto].  
Preset Speed Table [Slow, Fast]  
Set the preset speed table (Slow, Fast). During preset playback,  
presets are performed at [Preset Speed] (1 to 30) values that are  
based on the table set here.  
• When [Preset Speed Table] is set to [Fast], [Preset Speed] values  
equivalent to the AW-HE120 will be applied.  
<NOTE>  
• The digital zoom is set to OFF when color bars are displayed during  
digital zooming.  
Preset Speed [1 to 30]  
Set the pan/tilt movement speed used when recalling camera  
orientation information registered to the preset memory (30 steps).  
<NOTE>  
• When you set large [Preset Speed] values, the image may sway  
when the movement stops.  
Max Digital Zoom  
[x2, x3, x4, x5, x6, x7, x8, x9, x10]  
Set the maximum digital zoom magnification.  
Digital Extender [Off, On]  
Turn the digital extender function off/on.  
When this is set to [On], the digital zoom will be fixed at 1.4x.  
When [Digital Zoom] is set to [Enable], [Digital Extender] is disabled.  
Preset Scope [Mode A, Mode B, Mode C]  
Selected here are the setting items to be recalled when the contents  
of the preset memory are regenerated.  
Mode A: Pan, Tilt, Zoom (including digital zoom), Focus, Iris, Gain,  
white balance adjustment value  
OIS [Off, On]  
Turn the optical image stabilization function off/on.  
<NOTE>  
Mode B: Pan, Tilt, Zoom (including digital zoom), Focus, Iris  
Mode C: Pan, Tilt, Zoom (including digital zoom), Focus  
• The OIS function's level of correction is reduced during pan/tilt  
operations.  
Freeze During Preset [Off, On]  
Turn the function for freezing images during preset playback off/on.  
When this is set to [On], preset playback is performed with a still  
of the image immediately preceding the start of preset playback  
being output. The image freeze is released when preset playback is  
finished.  
Tally [Disable, Enable]  
“Enable” or “Disable” is set here for the function which turns on or  
turns off the tally lamp using the tally control signal.  
Speed With Zoom POS. [Off, On]  
Tally Brightness [Low, Mid, High]  
Adjust the brightness of the tally LED.  
<NOTE>  
• When this is set to [Low], the brightness is equivalent to that of the  
AW-HE120.  
“Off” or “On” is set here for the function used to adjust the pan-tilt  
adjustment speed in conjunction with the zoom magnification.  
When [On] is set, the panning and tilting operations will become  
slower in the zoom status.  
This function has no effect during preset operations.  
Return  
Return  
Return to the previous menu level.  
Return to the previous menu level.  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Camera menu items (continued)  
Other 3/4 screen  
Other 4/4 screen  
Others 3/4  
Others 4/4  
Wireless Control  
OSD Mix  
SDI Out  
Enable  
Audio  
Off  
Input Volume Line Middle  
Plugin Powe  
Protocol  
On  
On  
Off  
HDMI Out  
Video Out  
IP  
OSD Off With Tally  
OSD Status  
On  
On  
Off  
Off  
Model Select  
SEVIHD1  
Return  
Return  
Wireless Control [Disable, Enable]  
Audio [Off, On]  
“Enable” or “Disable” is set here for operations conducted from the  
Turn audio input off/on.  
wireless remote control.  
The operations are enabled when the unit’s power is turned on from  
an external device other than a wireless remote control, and they are  
disabled when the power is turned on from a wireless remote control.  
<NOTE>  
• At the point when this item’s setting is changed, the new setting is  
not reflected in operation.  
It is reflected when the unit is set to the standby mode and its power  
is turned on.  
• Follow one of the procedures below if the item’s setting is changed  
by mistake and the unit can no longer be operated from a wireless  
remote control.  
Input Volume  
[Mic High, Mic Middle, Mic Low, Line High, Line Middle,  
Line Low]  
Set the mic input, line input, and volume.  
Mic High:  
Mic Middle: Use the mic input with the volume set to medium.  
Mic Low: Use the mic input with the volume set to low.  
Line High: Use the line input with the volume set to high.  
Line Middle: Use the line input with the volume set to medium.  
Line Low: Use the line input with the volume set to low.  
Use the mic input with the volume set to high.  
When menu operations can be performed using another  
control device:  
→First change the item using a control device capable of performing  
menu operations, and then turn off the unit’s power and turn it  
back on.  
When menu operations cannot be performed using other  
control devices:  
1. Turn off the power of the units and devices that are connected.  
2. Disconnect the unit’s power cable, and plug it back in.  
3. Perform the operation for turning on the unit’s power from the  
wireless remote control.  
Plugin Power [Off, On]  
Turn the plugin power for the audio off/on.  
This is only enabled when [Input Volume] is set to mic input.  
Protocol Model Select  
[SEVIHD1, SBRC300, SBRCZ330, Reserved1 to Reserved7]  
Set the protocol model for standard serial communication.  
Appears when the service switch (SW4) at the bottom of the unit is  
set to ON (standard serial communication).  
Do not select [Reserved1] to [Reserved7].  
4. After changing this item, turn off the unit’s power and turn it  
back on.  
Return  
Return to the previous menu level.  
OSD Mix  
Select whether to turn off/on camera menu, status, and other displays  
for each output image.  
SDI Out [Off, On]  
HDMI Out [Off, On]  
Video Out [Off, On]  
IP [Off, On]  
Off:The camera menus and statuses are not displayed on the output  
pictures targeted by the setting items listed above.  
On:The camera menus and statuses are displayed for the output  
pictures covered by the setting items listed above.  
<NOTE>  
• When this is set to [Off], the camera menu can be displayed for  
about 1 minute after the unit is turned on.  
OSD Off With Tally [Off, On]  
Enable or disable the function that turns off camera menu, status,  
and other displays when tally signals are received via commands or  
contacts.  
When the tally signal releases, the camera menu display will return.  
OSD Status [Off, On]  
Turn the status display during AWB and ABB on/off.  
Return  
Return to the previous menu level.  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Camera menu items (continued)  
Maintenance screen  
Firmware VER 1/2 screen  
Maintenance  
Firmware VER 1/2  
Firmware Version  
IP Network  
Initialize  
CPU Software  
Interface  
Camera Main  
Servo  
V01.00  
V01.00  
V01.00  
V01.00  
Network  
EEPROM  
Interface  
V01.00  
Return  
Return  
Firmware Version  
CPU Software Interface  
This is selected to display the [Firmware Version] screen on which the  
user can check the version of the firmware which is currently installed  
in the unit.  
Display the software version of the interface.  
CPU Software Camera Main  
Display the software version of the camera unit.  
IP Network  
This is selected to display the [IP Network] screen on which the user  
can check the [IP Address], [Subnet Mask] and [Default Gateway]  
settings which have been established in the unit.  
CPU Software Servo  
Display the software version of the servo.  
CPU Software Network  
Display the software version of the network.  
Initialize  
This is selected to display the [Initialize] screen on which the user can  
initialize the camera settings.  
For details on operation,, refer to “Concerning initialization” (→ page  
EEPROM Interface  
Display the EEPROM version of the interface.  
Return  
Return  
Return to the previous menu level.  
Return to the previous menu level.  
Firmware VER 2/2 screen  
Firmware VER 2/2  
FPGA  
Lens  
AVIO  
Com  
V01.00  
V01.00  
V01.00  
Return  
FPGA Lens  
Display the FPGA version of the lens.  
FPGA AVIO  
Display the FPGA version of the AVIO.  
FPGA Com  
Display the FPGA version of the communication.  
Return  
Return to the previous menu level.  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Camera menu items (continued)  
IP Network screen  
Menu settings initialized screen  
IP Network  
IP Address  
Menu settings  
initialized  
192.168. 0. 10  
Subnet Mask  
255.255.255. 0  
Default Gateway  
192.168. 0. 1  
Return  
• When the cursor is moved to [CANCEL] on the Initialize screen  
and the setting is entered, the [Menu settings unchanged] screen is  
displayed for 5 seconds, the initialization operation is not performed,  
and the [Maintenance] screen returns to the display.  
IP Address  
This is selected to display the IP address which has been set for the  
unit.  
Menu settings unchanged screen  
Subnet Mask  
This is selected to display the subnet mask which has been set for  
the unit.  
Menu settings  
unchanged  
Default Gateway  
This is selected to display the default gateway which has been set for  
the unit.  
<NOTE>  
• On this screen, the [IP Address], [Subnet Mask] and [Default Gateway]  
settings can be displayed but they cannot be changed.  
To change an address, use “Network” (→page @@) on the Web  
setting screen or “Easy IP Setup Software” (→page @@).  
Return  
Return to the previous menu level.  
Concerning initialization  
When [Initialize] is selected on the [Maintenance] screen, the [Initialize]  
screen appears.  
Initialize screen  
Initialize  
Do you want to initialize  
Menu settings?  
CANCEL  
O.K.  
• When the cursor is moved to [O.K.] on the [Initialize] screen and the  
setting is entered, the [Menu settings initialized] screen is displayed for  
5 seconds, and the camera settings are restored to the settings which  
were established when the camera was purchased.  
However, the [Format] settings and [Frequency] settings (→ page 55)  
and network settings are not initialized.  
<NOTE>  
• Operation returns to the Top Menu screen when the initialization  
operation is completed. At this point, set the unit to the STANDBY  
mode, and then set it to the POWER ON mode again. (See page 25)  
• The [Format] and [Frequency] settings are not initialized.  
• The [AWB] and [ABB] adjustment values are not initialized.  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Camera menu items  
Camera menu  
Item  
Factory setting  
Selection items  
Top Menu Camera  
Scene  
Scene  
Scene1  
0
Scene1, Scene2, Scene3, Scene4  
-50 to +50 (step: 1)  
Brightness Brightness Picture Level  
1/2  
Iris Mode  
Auto  
Off  
Manual, Auto  
Shutter Mode  
Step/Synchro  
(When [Shutter Mode] 1/100  
Off, Step, Synchro, ELC  
[59.94Hz]  
[When Frequency is set to 59.94 Hz]  
• 59.94p / 59.94i mode  
is set to [Step])  
[50Hz]  
1/120  
1/100, 1/120, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000,  
1/4000, 1/10000  
• 29.97p mode  
1/30, 1/60, 1/120, 1/250,1/500, 1/1000,  
1/2000, 1/4000, 1/10000  
• 23.98p mode  
1/24, 1/60, 1/120, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000,  
1/2000, 1/4000, 1/10000  
[When Frequency is set to 50Hz]  
• 50p / 50i mode  
1/60, 1/120, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000,  
1/4000, 1/10000  
• 25p mode  
1/25, 1/60, 1/120, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000,  
1/2000, 1/4000, 1/10000  
Step/Synchro  
(When [Shutter Mode] 60.15Hz  
is set to [Synchro])  
[59.94Hz]  
[When Frequency is set to 59.94 Hz]  
60.15 Hz to 642.21 Hz (255 steps)  
[When Frequency is set to 50 Hz]  
50.15Hz to 535.71Hz (255 steps)  
[50Hz]  
50.15Hz  
Gain  
0dB  
Auto, 0dB to 36dB (step: 1dB)  
6dB, 12dB, 18dB  
AGC Max Gain  
Frame Mix  
18dB  
Off  
Off, 6dB, 12dB, 18dB, 24dB  
Through, 1/8, 1/64  
ND Filter  
Through  
Day  
Brightness Day/Night  
Day, Night  
2/2  
Picture  
Picture 1/3 Chroma Level  
0%  
OFF, -99% to 40%  
White Balance Mode  
AWB A  
AWB A, AWB B, ATW, 3200K, 5600K,  
VAR  
1
2000K to 15000K  
*
Color Temperature  
R Gain  
3200K  
0
-150 to +150 (step: 1)  
-150 to +150 (step: 1)  
-150 to +150 (step: 1)  
-100 to +100 (step: 1)  
-100 to +100 (step: 1)  
Off, On  
B Gain  
0
Pedestal  
0
R Pedestal  
B Pedestal  
0
0
Picture 2/3 Detail  
On  
31  
0
Master Detail  
V Detail Level  
Detail Band  
0 to 62  
-7 to +7  
0
-7 to +7  
Noise Suppress  
1
0 to 60  
FleshTone NoiseSUP. 16  
0 to 31  
Gamma Type  
HD  
HD, SD, FILMLIKE1, FILMLIKE2,  
FILMLIKE3  
Gamma  
DRS  
0.45  
Off  
0.30 to 0.75 (Step: 0.01)  
Off, Low, Mid, High  
Off, Auto, Manual  
70.0% to 107.0% (Step: 0.5%)  
0 to 99  
Picture 3/3 Knee Mode  
Knee Point  
Auto  
93.0%  
85  
Knee Slope  
White Clip  
On  
Off, On  
White Clip Level  
DNR  
109%  
Off  
90% to 109%  
Off, Low, High  
1
Step intervals increase as values become larger.  
*
(2000/2010/2020/2040/2050/2070/2080/2090/2110/2120/2140/2150/2170/2180/2200/2210/2230/2240/2260/2280/2300/2310/2330/2340/2360/2380/  
2400/2420/2440/2460/2480/2500/2520/2540/2560/2600/2620/2640/2680/2700/2720/2740/2780/2800/2820/2850/2870/2920/2950/2970/3000/3020/  
3070/3100/3120/3150/3200/3250/3270/3330/3360/3420/3450/3510/3570/3600/3660/3720/3780/3840/3870/3930/3990/4050/4110/4170/4240/4320/  
4360/4440/4520/4600/4680/4760/4840/4920/5000/5100/5200/5300/5400/5500/5600/5750/5850/6000/6150/6300/6450/6650/6800/7000/7150/7400/  
7600/7800/8100/8300/8600/8900/9200/9600/10000/10500/11000/11500/12000/12500/13000/14000/15000)  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Camera menu items (continued)  
Camera menu  
Item  
Matrix 1/5 Matrix Type  
Factory setting  
Selection items  
Top Menu Camera  
Scene Matrix  
Normal  
Normal EBU NTSC User  
Normal, EBU, NTSC, User  
Matrix 2/5 [Linear Matrix]  
R-G  
R-B  
G-R  
G-B  
B-R  
B-G  
-63 to +63  
-63 to +63  
-63 to +63  
-63 to +63  
-63 to +63  
-63 to +63  
Matrix 3/5 [Color Correction 1/3]  
B_Mg Saturation  
B_Mg Phase  
Normal EBU NTSC User  
-63 to +63  
-63 to +63  
-63 to +63  
-63 to +63  
-63 to +63  
-63 to +63  
-63 to +63  
-63 to +63  
-63 to +63  
-63 to +63  
-63 to +63  
-63 to +63  
Mg Saturation  
Mg Phase  
Mg_R Saturation  
Mg_R Phase  
Mg_R_R Saturation  
Mg_R_R Phase  
R Saturation  
R Phase  
R_R_Yl Saturation  
R_R_Yl Phase  
Matrix 4/5 [Color Correction 2/3]  
R_Yl Saturation  
R_Yl Phase  
Normal EBU NTSC User  
-63 to +63  
-63 to +63  
-63 to +63  
-63 to +63  
-63 to +63  
-63 to +63  
-63 to +63  
-63 to +63  
-63 to +63  
-63 to +63  
-63 to +63  
-63 to +63  
R_Yl_Yl Saturation  
R_Yl_Yl Phase  
Yl Saturation  
Yl Phase  
Yl_G Saturation  
Yl_G Phase  
G Saturation  
G Phase  
G_Cy Saturation  
G_Cy Phase  
Matrix 5/5 [Color Correction 3/3]  
Cy Saturation  
Normal EBU NTSC User  
-63 to +63  
-63 to +63  
-63 to +63  
-63 to +63  
-63 to +63  
-63 to +63  
-206 to +49  
1 to 10  
Cy Phase  
Cy_B Saturation  
Cy_B Phase  
B Saturation  
B Phase  
Genlock  
Output  
Horizontal Phase  
Horizontal Phase Step  
Format  
0
1
1080/59.94i  
[When Frequency is set to 59.94 Hz]  
1080/59.94p, 1080/29.97p, 1080/23.98p,  
1080/59.94i, 1080/29.97PsF,  
1080/23.98PsF, 720/59.94p, 480/59.94p(i)  
[When Frequency is set to 50Hz]  
1080/50p, 1080/25p, 1080/50i,  
1080/25PsF, 720/50p, 576/50p(i)  
Down CONV. Mode  
HDMI Color  
Squeeze  
Squeeze, Letter Box, Sidecut  
YCbCr422  
RGB-NOR, RGB-ENH, YCbCr422,  
YCbCr444  
Frequency  
59.94Hz  
Off  
59.94Hz, 50Hz  
Off, On  
Color Bars Setup  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Camera menu items (continued)  
Camera menu  
Item  
Factory setting  
Selection items  
Desktop, Hanging  
Top Menu System  
Others Others 1/4  
Install Position  
Desktop  
Off  
Smart Picture Flip  
Flip Detect Angle  
Preset Speed Table  
Preset Speed  
Off, Auto  
90deg  
Fast  
60 to 120deg (step: 1deg)  
Slow, Fast  
20  
1 to 30  
Preset Scope  
Mode A  
Off  
Mode A, Mode B, Mode C  
Off, On  
Freeze During Preset  
Speed With Zoom POS. On  
Off, On  
Others 2/4  
Focus Mode  
Auto  
Manual, Auto  
Off, On  
Focus ADJ With PTZ. On  
Digital Zoom  
Max Digital Zoom  
Digital Extender  
OIS  
Disable  
Disable, Enable  
x2 to x10  
x10  
Off  
Off, On  
Off  
Off, On  
Tally  
Enable  
Low  
Enable, Disable  
Low, Mid, High  
Enable, Disable  
Tally Brightness  
Wireless Control  
OSD Mix  
Others 3/4  
Enable  
SDI Out  
On  
On  
On  
On  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off, On  
Off, On  
Off, On  
Off, On  
Off, On  
Off, On  
Off, On  
HDMI Out  
Video Out  
IP  
OSD Off With Tally  
OSD Status  
Audio  
Others 4/4  
Input Volume  
Line Middle  
Mic High, Mic Middle, Mic Low, Line High,  
Line Middle, Line Low  
Plugin Power  
Protocol  
Off  
Off, On  
Model Select  
SEVIHD1  
SEVIHD1, SBRC300, SBRCZ330,  
Reserved1 to 7  
Maintenance Firmware Version  
CPU Software  
Interface  
Camera Main  
Servo  
Version at shipping  
Version at shipping  
Version at shipping  
Version at shipping  
- - -  
- - -  
- - -  
- - -  
Network  
EEPROM  
Interface  
FPGA  
Version at shipping  
- - -  
Lens  
Version at shipping  
Version at shipping  
Version at shipping  
192.168.0.10  
- - -  
- - -  
- - -  
AVIO  
Com  
IP Network  
Initialize  
IP Address  
Subnet Mask  
Default Gateway  
---  
255.255.255.0  
192.168.0.1  
CANCEL  
CANCEL, OK  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Displaying the web screen  
With a personal computer connected to the unit, it is possible to view  
the camera’s IP videos or select various settings from the web browser  
screen.  
Displaying the web screen using a personal  
computer  
The procedure is explained here using Windows screens (Internet  
Explorer), but it is the same when using the Mac (Safari) 1 screens.  
The LAN crossover cable is used when connecting a personal computer  
directly to the unit’s LAN connector for IP control, and the LAN straight  
cable is used when making the connection through a switching hub.  
*
1
There may be differences in some parts of the screen displays.  
*
1. Start the web browser of the personal computer.  
Use one of the web browsers below depending on the operating  
system installed in the personal computer.  
Select an IP address for the personal computer within the private  
address range while ensuring that it is different from the address of the  
unit. Set the subnet mask to the same address as the unit.  
Operating system  
Web browser  
installed  
<NOTE>  
Windows  
Internet Explorer  
Safari  
• If you need to change the IP address and subnet mask, be sure to ask  
your dealer to make these changes for you.  
Mac OS X  
Unit’s IP address and subnet mask (factory settings)  
2. Enter the IP address you configured on the Easy IP Setup  
Software in the address bar of the web browser.  
IP address:  
192.168.0.10  
255.255.255.0  
Subnet mask:  
Range of private addresses: 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.0.255  
IPv4 address entry example:  
http://<URL registered with IPv4 address>  
http://192.168.0.10/  
• If the controller and web browser are being used at the same time, the  
content selected using the controller may not be reflected on the web  
browser display.  
When using both the controller and web browser, be absolutely sure to  
check the settings using the controller or camera menu.  
For details of the required personal computer environment,  
refer to page @@.  
IPv6 address entry example:  
http://[<URL registered with IPv6 address>]  
http://[2001:db8::10]/  
<NOTE>  
• Some functions on the web setting screen can be used only from a  
personal computer which is running Windows.  
(They cannot be used from a personal computer which is running Mac  
OS X.)  
<NOTE>  
• If the HTTP port number has been changed from “80”, enter  
“http://<camera IP address>:<port number>” in the address bar.  
Example: When the port number is set to 8080  
Functions which can be used by Windows only are indicated using the  
mark.  
http://192.168.0.11:8080  
• The “Network Camera View 4S” plug-in viewer software must have  
already been installed in order to display the unit’s IP videos using a  
personal computer which is running Windows.  
(This is not required for a personal computer which is running MAC  
OS X.)  
• If the unit is located on the local network, configure proxy server  
settings on the web browser ([Tool] - [Internet Options] in the menu  
bar) so that a proxy server is not used for the local address.  
• For details on when [HTTPS] - [Connection] (→ page @@) is set  
to [HTTPS] in the [Advanced] tab of the Network screen, see “@@  
Accessing the camera via HTTPS@@” (→ page @@).  
For further details, refer to “Plug-in viewer software (Network Camera  
View 4S)” (→page @@).  
3. Press the [Enter] key.  
The web screen appears.  
The Live screen (→ page @@) is displayed initially. You can switch  
to the Setup screen (→ page @@) when necessary. (→ page @@)  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Displaying the web screen (continued)  
<NOTE>  
Switching between the Live screen and Setup  
• If the personal computer does not have the plug-in viewer software  
already installed, an installation confirmation message is displayed  
before the Live screen is displayed. In a case like this, follow the  
on-screen instructions to install the software.  
screen  
When the Live screen is displayed, click the  
button.  
For details on the Setup screen, see “Setup screen” (→ page @@).  
For further details, refer to “Plug-in viewer software (Network  
Camera View 4S)” (→ page @@).  
• When “User Authentication” (→ page @@) is set to “On”, the user  
name and password input screen is displayed before the Live  
screen page appears.  
The default settings for the user name and password are as follows.  
User name  
Password  
admin  
12345  
• While the initial settings remain used for the user name and  
password, a message prompting the user to change the user name  
and password is displayed after authorization. In order to ensure  
security, the password for the user name of “admin” must be  
changed without fail. It is also recommended that the password be  
changed at regular intervals.  
When the Setup screen is displayed, click the  
For details on the Live screen, see “Live screen” (→ page @@).  
button.  
• When an attempt is made to display multiple H.264 images on one  
personal computer, IP videos may not be displayed depending on  
the performance of the personal computer concerned.  
• When an item which is underlined on the screen is clicked, a  
separate window opens, and an input example is displayed.  
• Up to 14 users (consisting of users receiving H.264 images and  
users receiving JPEG images) can access the unit at the same  
time. However, the number of users that can access the unit may  
be less than 14 depending on the [Bandwidth control (bitrate)]  
and [Max bit rate (per client)] settings. A message indicating the  
access limit will appear if the number of users exceeds 14. When  
[Transmission type] is set to [Multicast port] for [H.264], the second  
and subsequent users receiving H.264 images will not be counted  
toward the total access count.  
• When [H.264 transmission] (→ page @@) is set to [ON], H.264  
images are displayed. When it is set to [Off], JPEG images will  
be displayed. JPEG images can be displayed even when [H.264  
transmission] is set to [On]. In such cases, however, the maximum  
frame rate of the JPEG images will be 5 fps.  
• The JPEG image frame rate may be slower depending on the  
network environment, performance of your computer, subject of the  
video, and access volume.  
<JPEG image frame rate>  
When [H.264 transmission] is set to [On]  
Up to 5 fps  
When [H.264 transmission] is set to [Off]  
Up to 30 fps  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Web screen operations  
The Live screen includes a “single display mode” that displays IP images from a single camera and a “multi display mode” that displays IP images from  
multiple cameras.  
See below for details on the single display mode, and see page @@ for details on the multi display mode.  
Live screen: Single display mode  
You can display images from the camera on a computer and perform camera operations, such as pan, tilt, zoom, and focus control.  
The items displayed on the screen will differ depending on whether the [H.264] or [JPEG] button is selected under [Compression].  
When [H.264] is selected  
18  
19  
20  
1
2
3
10  
14  
6
7
8
9
11  
12  
13  
15  
17  
16  
When [JPEG] is selected  
18  
19  
20  
1
2
5
4
10  
14  
6
7
8
9
11  
12  
13  
15  
17  
16  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Web screen operations (continued)  
1. Multi-Screen list box (Multi-screen)  
The Live screen display method is selected here.  
5. Image Capture Size buttons  
These buttons appear only when JPEG images are displayed.  
When selected, the text on the button turns  
green, and the images in the main area appear  
in 1920 x 1080 size.  
The IP videos of the connected camera are  
displayed.  
(1920 x 1080)  
(Single)  
When selected, the text on the button turns  
(1280 x 720)  
green, and the images in the main area appear  
in 1280 x 720 size.  
(4Split 1/4 Group)  
(4Split 2/4 Group)  
(4Split 3/4 Group)  
(4Split 4/4 Group)  
(16Split)  
When selected, the text on the button turns  
green, and the images in the main area appear  
in 640 x 360 size.  
(640 x 360)  
When the cameras for multi-screen display  
have been set ahead of time using the multi-  
screen (→page @@), it is possible to view  
a multiple number of IP videos on a single  
screen. (Multi display mode)  
When selected, the text on the button turns  
green, and the images in the main area appear  
in 320 x 180 size.  
(320 x 180)  
(160x90)  
When selected, the text on the button turns  
green, and the images in the main area appear  
in 160 x 90 size.  
<NOTE>  
• The resolution selected with [JPEG(1)], [JPEG(2)], and [JPEG(3)]  
under [JPEG] in the [Video over IP] tab will be used.  
• If the resolution is set to [1920x1080] or [1280x720], the image may  
be compressed depending on the size of the web browser window.  
2. Compression button (Compression)  
When selected, the text on the button turns green,  
6. OSD Menu Operation  
and H.264 images are displayed.  
The [H.264] button is enabled when the “H.264  
transmission” setting of [H.264 (1)] to [H.264 (4)]  
on the Video over IP is “On”. (→page @@)  
Use this to select whether the camera’s on-  
screen displays are to be shown.  
(H264)  
(On / Off)  
It cancels the selection of the setting which  
is being changed. It restores the pre-change  
setting.  
When selected, the text on the button turns green,  
and JPEG images are displayed.  
(Cancel)  
(JPEG)  
Use these to perform the menu operations.  
The items are selected using the [¡/¢/£/¤]  
buttons.  
If a selected item has a sub menu, this sub  
menu is displayed by pressing the [OK]  
button.  
When the cursor is moved to any item on  
the bottom-level setting screen and the [OK]  
button is pressed, the setting of the selected  
item starts flashing.  
A setting for a regular menu item is reflected  
immediately if it is changed while it is still  
flashing. However, there are a number of  
menu items (Scene, Format and Initialize)  
whose setting is reflected only after the [OK]  
button has been pressed, causing the setting  
to stop flashing and the new setting to be  
entered.  
<NOTE>  
• When [H.264 transmission] is set to “On,” H.264 video will be  
displayed in the following cases even if the camera is set to display  
JPEG video.  
- When returning from another screen  
- When the screen is updated  
3. Stream buttons  
These buttons appear only when H.264 images are displayed.  
(¡/¢/£/¤/OK)  
When selected, the text on the button turns green, and  
the images in the main area appear according to the  
settings configured for [H.264(1)].  
(1)  
(2)  
(3)  
(4)  
When selected, the text on the button turns green, and  
the images in the main area appear according to the  
settings configured for [H.264(2)].  
When selected, the text on the button turns green, and  
the images in the main area appear according to the  
settings configured for [H.264(3)].  
7. Camera button / Color bar button (CAM/BAR)  
Use this to output the camera pictures.  
(CAM)  
When selected, the text on the button turns green, and  
the images in the main area appear according to the  
settings configured for [H.264(4)].  
Use this to output the color bar signals.  
(BAR)  
4. Image quality buttons  
These buttons appear only when JPEG images are displayed.  
When selected, images appear according to the  
settings configured for [Quality1] in the JPEG image  
(1)  
(2)  
quality settings (→ page @@).  
When selected, images appear according to the  
settings configured for [Quality2] in the JPEG image  
quality settings (→ page @@).  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Web screen operations (continued)  
<NOTE>  
8. Power ON button /  
Standby button  
• When the shooting scenes vary significantly, restrictions imposed  
by the graphics processing (GDI) of the operating system installed  
may give rise to a phenomenon called “screen tearing” (where parts  
of the picture are not displayed in synchronization) although this will  
depend on the personal computer used.  
Turn the unit on.  
(Power ON)  
• On a personal computer running Windows, if “H.264 transmission”  
(→page @@) is set to “On”, H.264 images and JPEG images can  
be displayed. H.264 images will appear immediately after they  
appear on the Live screen (in single display mode). When it is set to  
[Off], only JPEG images will appear.  
• On a personal computer running Mac OS X, regardless of the  
“H.264 transmission” settings, only JPEG images will appear.  
(H.264 images will not appear.)  
Set the unit to STANDBY mode.  
(Standby)  
In the standby mode, all the buttons on the Live screen except for the  
[Multi-screen] list box, [Power ON] button, [Standby] button and [Op.  
Lock] button are disabled.  
<NOTE>  
• If Power ON or Standby is selected too quickly, the status selected  
and the display shown may not correspond. In a case like this,  
follow the steps below to restore the correct status display:  
For Windows:  
• When [H.264 transmission] is set to [On], the frame rate for JPEG  
images may drop, regardless of whether H.264 images are being  
transmitted.  
• The speed at which the JPEG images are refreshed may be  
reduced depending on the network environment, performance of the  
personal computer used, subjects and number of access users.  
• Up to 14 users (consisting of users receiving H.264 images and  
users receiving JPEG images) can access the unit at the same  
time. (The maximum number of Android terminals which can be  
connected to the unit at the same time is one.) However, depending  
on the settings for the “Bandwidth control(bit rate)” and “Max bit rate  
Press the [F5] key on the keyboard of the personal computer.  
For Mac OS X:  
Press the [Command] + [R] keys on the keyboard of the personal  
computer.  
When operation is transferred to the Standby mode:  
The current zoom, focus and iris positions are stored in the memory  
(POWER ON preset).  
When operation is transferred to the POWER ON mode:  
The zoom, focus and iris are adjusted to the positions which were  
stored in the memory (POWER ON preset) when operation was  
transferred to the STANDBY mode.  
(per client) ”, the number of users who can access the unit may be  
*
limited to 14.  
• If the maximum number of users who can access the unit has  
exceeded the upper limit, a message advising that the unit is being  
accessed by more users than the maximum number allowed is  
displayed.  
9. Operation lock button  
Use this to lock the operation of the pan, tilt,  
zoom, focus, brightness, speed, preset and scene  
operations on the control screen.  
• In the case of a personal computer which is running Mac OS X, the  
” icon appears in the center of the main area which is displayed  
on a black screen.  
Use this also to lock the on-screen display menu  
• When [Disable] is selected for [Tally] (→page @@, page @@), the  
camera’s tally lamp will not light even when the tally signal is input.  
However, the area frame of the main area (IP video display area)  
will turn red.  
(Op. Lock)  
operations, CAM/BAR and Power ON button/  
Standby button to prevent operations from being  
performed by accident.  
10.Main area (IP video display area)  
11.Zoom  
Use this to enable or disable the digital zoom.  
(D-Zoom)  
Use this to enable or disable the digital extender.  
(D-Extender)  
Use this to adjust the zoom (magnification) to 1.0x.  
(×1.0)  
Use this to adjust the zoom (magnification) in the  
Wide direction.  
(-)  
Use this to adjust the zoom (magnification) in the  
Tele direction.  
The IP video of the connected camera will be displayed.  
While the tally lamp is on, the area frame will turn red.  
(+)  
When the tally lamp is off, the display area will return to normal.  
The camera image can be zoomed in and out by operating the mouse  
12.Focus  
Use this to switch between auto and manual  
focusing. When Auto is selected, the focus is  
adjusted automatically.  
wheel inside the display area.  
When the image is zoomed in, click within the display area at the  
desired new center position for the angle of view, then the camera  
(Auto)  
(Near)  
image will appear centered around that position.  
Use this to adjust the focus in the Near direction.  
It does not work during automatic adjustments.  
When this is pressed while the focus is being  
adjusted manually, the focus will be temporarily  
adjusted automatically.  
(O.T.AF)  
(Far)  
It does not work during automatic adjustments.  
Use this to adjust the focus in the Far direction.  
It does not work during automatic adjustments.  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Web screen operations (continued)  
13.Control pad and its buttons  
18.Full-screen display button  
To adjust the image in the horizontal or vertical  
direction (panning or tilting), left-click the pad and  
the buttons.  
The more the outside of the pad is clicked, the  
faster the camera operates. Adjustment is also  
possible by dragging the mouse.  
Right-click the pad to initiate zooming and  
focusing.  
When the top half of the pad is clicked in the up  
or down direction, the zoom (magnification) is  
adjusted in the Tele direction; conversely, when  
the bottom half of the pad is clicked, the zoom is  
adjusted in the Wide direction.  
When the left half of the pad is clicked in the left  
or right direction, the focus is adjusted in the Near  
direction; conversely when the right half of the  
pad is clicked, the focus is adjusted in the Far  
direction. The zooming can also be adjusted by  
operating the mouse wheel.  
Display the image in full-screen mode.  
When the image displayed in the main area is  
compressed, clicking this once displays the image at the  
correct resolution in the main area. When the image is  
displayed at the correct resolution, the image is displayed  
in full-screen mode. To return to the live image page,  
press the [Esc] key on the computer while the image is  
displayed in full-screen mode.  
The aspect ratio of the displayed image will be adjusted  
according to the monitor size.  
19.Snapshot button  
Capture a snapshot (single still image), and display it in a  
separate window. A menu appears when you right-click the  
image, and you can select [Save] to save the image to the  
computer.  
You can also click [Print] to output from a printer.  
<NOTE>  
<NOTE>  
• The following settings may be necessary.  
• When the mouse is used for dragging and dropping from the control  
pad area to a position outside this area, the panning, tilting and  
other operations will not stop.  
In a case like this, click the control pad area to stop these  
operations.  
In the Internet Explorer menu bar, click [Tools] - [Internet Options] -  
[Security] tab, select [Trusted Sites], and then click [Sites]. Register  
the camera’s address under [Websites] in the window that appears.  
• Depending on the network environment, for example, if snapshot  
capture takes longer than a certain amount of time, the image may  
not appear.  
14.Brightness  
Use this to make the image darker.  
It does not work during automatic adjustments.  
20.Audio button  
(-)  
Turn the audio on/off. (→ page @@)  
When you click this button, the button display changes  
Use this to make the image lighter.  
It does not work during automatic adjustments.  
to  
, and audio from the unit cannot be heard from  
(+)  
the computer.  
Use this to switch the brightness adjustment between auto  
and manual. When Auto is selected, the picture brightness  
is adjusted automatically.  
Move the cursor (  
of three levels.  
) to adjust the volume to one  
(Auto)  
15.Speed  
Use this to select the speed at which the pan, tilt, zoom  
and focus operations are to be performed.  
(Slow)  
16.Preset  
When the preset position is selected from the pull-down  
menu and the Move button is clicked, the camera direction  
moves to the preset position which was registered ahead  
of time.  
Preset positions are registered on the preset position  
screen.  
(Home)  
(Move)  
The camera direction moves to the preset position which  
is now selected on the pull-down menu.  
The settings that are reproduced at this position are the  
settings which were established on the [Preset Scope]  
menu (→ page @@, page @@, page @@).  
The camera direction moves to the home position if  
“Home” has been selected on the pull-down menu.  
17.Scene  
(Man.1)  
(Set)  
Select a shooting mode from the pull-down menu, and  
click the Set button to switch to the selected mode.  
The shooting mode switches to the one selected in the  
pull-down menu.  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Web screen operations (continued)  
Live screen: Multi display mode  
In this mode, the images of a multiple number of cameras can be monitored on one screen (called the ‘multi screen’).  
The image of 4 cameras or max. 16 cameras can be monitored at one time.  
When the camera title of any of the images is clicked, the Live screen (single display mode) of the camera concerned is displayed as a separate  
window.  
In order to use the multi screen, the cameras whose images are to be shown on the multi screen must be set ahead of time.  
With one group consisting of 4 cameras, up to four groups of cameras (a total of 16 cameras) can be registered. (→page @@)  
1
Multi screen consisting of 4 sub-screens  
Multi screen consisting of 16 sub-screens  
<NOTE>  
1. Multi-Screen list box (Multi-screen)  
• The IP videos displayed on the multi screen are JPEG images only.  
• IP images are in JPEG format only and audio is not output.  
• Images are stretched vertically to fit the [4:3] aspect ratio of the multi  
screens.  
The Live screen display method is selected here.  
The IP videos of the connected camera are  
displayed.  
(Single)  
• It is not possible to transfer from the Live screen to the multi screen  
if the unit’s power has been turned off, or the network cable has  
been disconnected, while IP videos are being displayed.  
(4Split 4/1 Group)  
(4Split 4/2 Group)  
(4Split 4/3 Group)  
(4Split 4/4 Group)  
(16Split)  
When the cameras for multi-screen display  
have been set ahead of time using the multi-  
screen (→page @@), it is possible to view  
a multiple number of IP videos on a single  
screen. (Multi display mode)  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Web screen configurations  
Logging into the Setup screen  
1. Click the [Setup] button. (→ page @@)  
The login screen appears.  
3. Click the [OK] button.  
Click [OK] again when the following screen appears.  
<NOTE>  
• While the initial settings remain used for the user name and  
password, a message prompting the user to change the user name  
and password is displayed after authorization. In order to ensure  
security, the password for the user name of “admin” must be  
changed without fail.  
2. Enter the user name and password.  
The default settings for the user name and password are as follows.  
User name  
Password  
admin  
12345  
It is also recommended that the password be changed at regular  
intervals.  
Web setup screen (Setup)  
The settings for the unit are selected on this screen.  
<NOTE>  
• The setting menu operations can be performed only by users whose access level is “1. Administrator”.  
For the procedure used to set the access level, refer to page @@.  
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
7
1. Basic button  
When the Basic button is pressed, the Basic screen is displayed in  
4. User mng. button  
When the User mng. button is pressed, the User mng. screen is  
the main area.  
displayed in the main area.  
→ “Basic screen” (→ page @@)  
→ “User mng. screen” (→ page @@)  
2. Image button  
When the Image button is pressed, the Image screen is displayed in  
5. Network button  
When the Network button is pressed, the Network setup screen is  
the main area.  
displayed in the main area.  
→ “Image screen” (→ page @@)  
→ “Network setup screen” (→ page @@)  
3. Multi-Screen button (Multi-Screen)  
When the Image button is pressed, the Multi-Screen setup screen is  
displayed in the main area.  
6. Maintenance button  
When the Maintenance button is pressed, the Maintenance screen is  
displayed in the main area.  
→ “Multi-Screen setup screen” (→ page @@)  
→ “Maintenance screen” (→ page @@)  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Web screen configurations (continued)  
7. Power ON button / Standby button  
Basic screen  
Turn the unit on.  
(Power ON)  
Set the unit to STANDBY mode.  
(Standby)  
In the standby mode, it is not possible to select [Image/Position] or  
[System] under the Image button or [Backup] under the Maintenance  
button. All items in the [Setup] screen are also disabled.  
Camera title  
Input the name of the camera here.  
When the Set button is clicked, the input name appears in the camera  
title display area.  
8. Main area  
The menu screen is displayed.  
• The initial setting is “AW-HE130.”  
• You can enter between 0 to 20 half-size characters.  
• The following characters can be displayed.  
9. Camera title display area.  
The name for the unit configured in the Basic screen (→ page @@)  
appears.  
Half-size numeric  
characters  
0123456789  
Half-size  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ  
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz  
alphabetical  
characters  
(upper and lower  
cases)  
Symbols  
! #$%´() +,-./:;<=>?@[]^_`{|}˜\  
*
Automatic installation of viewer software  
One of the following settings is selected for the automatic installation  
of the plug-in viewer software.  
Setting value:  
On  
Off  
The plug-in viewer software is automatically  
installed.  
The plug-in viewer software is not automatically  
installed.  
Factory settings: On  
Smoother live video display on the browser (buffering)  
Configure settings for displaying images from the unit on the plug-in  
viewer software.  
Setting value:  
On  
Off  
Temporarily store images from the unit onto the  
computer for smoother display.  
Do not temporarily store images from the unit onto  
the computer, and display them in real time.  
Factory settings: On  
<NOTE>  
• Images and audio cannot be viewed or heard on computers on  
which the “Network Camera View 4S” plug-in viewer software is not  
installed.  
• You can view the number of times the plug-in software was installed  
under the [Product info] tab in the [Maintenance] menu of the unit’s  
browser menu screen.  
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Web screen configurations (continued)  
Refresh interval (JPEG)  
Select the frame rate for JPEG images.  
Setting value:  
Image screen  
IP video settings tab (Video over IP)  
For 60Hz:  
The JPEG image and H.264 image settings as well as the settings  
related to image quality are selected on this screen.  
1fps/2fps/3fps/5fps/6fps 1 /10fps 1 /15fps 1 /30fps  
1
*
*
*
*
For 50Hz:  
1fps/2fps/5fps/10fps 1 /12.5fps 1 /25fps  
1
*
*
*
Factory settings: 5fps  
1
When [H.264 transmission] is set to [On], the frame rate may be  
slower than the specified value in some cases.  
*
<NOTE>  
• The frame rate may be slower depending on the network  
environment, resolution, image quality, access volume, etc.  
• If images are not transmitted at the specified frame rate, lowering  
the resolution or image quality may result in transmissions closer to  
the specified value.  
Image quality (JPEG)  
When displaying JPEG images in the Live screen, set the quality of  
the first image that appears to Quality1 or Quality2.  
Setting value:  
Quality1  
Quality2  
Image quality 1  
Image quality 2  
Factory settings: Quality1  
z JPEG  
Set the resolution and quality settings for [JPEG(1)], [JPEG(2)], and  
[JPEG(3)]. For details on settings for H.264 images, see page @@.  
Image capture size  
Select the resolution of the images to be displayed when displaying  
JPEG images.  
Setting value:  
JPEG(1):  
1920x1080/1280x720/640x360/320x180/160x90  
JPEG(2):  
1280x720/640x360/320x180/160x90  
JPEG(3):  
640x360/320x180/160x90  
Factory settings:  
JPEG(1): 1920×1080  
JPEG(2): 640×360  
JPEG(3): 320×180  
Image quality  
Specify the JPEG image quality (2 types) for each resolution.  
Setting value:  
0 Super fine / 1 Fine / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 Normal / 6 / 7 / 8 / 9 Low  
Factory settings:  
Image quality 1: 5 Normal  
z Initial display settings for “Live” page  
Set initial display settings for the Live screen.  
Image quality 2: 8  
Stream  
Select the type of images to display in the Live screen.  
Setting value:  
z H.264(1) • H.264(2) • H.264(3) • H.264(4)  
Specify the [Max bit rate (per client)], [Image capture size], [Image  
quality], and other settings for H.264 images.  
Display videos (H.264(1)).  
H.264(1)  
For details on setting the JPEG images, refer to page @@.  
Display videos (H.264(2)).  
H.264(2)  
Display videos (H.264(3)).  
H.264(3)  
H.264 transmission  
Whether to transmit the H.264 images is set here using On or Off.  
Setting value:  
Display videos (H.264(4)).  
H.264(4)  
JPEG(1)  
JPEG(2)  
JPEG(3)  
Display still images (JPEG(1))  
Display still images (JPEG(2))  
Display still images (JPEG(3))  
On  
Off  
H.264 images are transmitted.  
H.264 images are not transmitted.  
Factory settings: On  
Factory settings: H264(1)  
<NOTE>  
• When “On” has been selected as the [H.264 transmission] setting,  
both H.264 images and JPEG images can be displayed on the live  
screen.  
• When “On” has been selected as the [H.264 transmission] setting,  
the image refresh interval may become slower.  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Web screen configurations (continued)  
Internet mode (over HTTP)  
Framerate  
This setting is selected when transmitting H.264 images over the  
Set the frame rate for H.264 images.  
Internet.  
Setting value:  
H.264 images can be transmitted using the same broadband router  
settings as when transmitting JPEG images.  
Setting value:  
For 60Hz:  
1
5fps 1 / 15fps 1 / 30fps 1 / 60fps  
*
*
*
*
For 50Hz:  
5fps 1 / 12.5fps 1 / 25fps 1 / 50fps  
1
On  
The H.264 images and audio are transmitted using the HTTP  
port. For details on setting the HTTP port number, refer to  
page @@.  
*
*
*
*
Factory settings:  
For 60Hz: 30fps  
For 50Hz: 25fps  
1
Off  
The H.264 images and audio are transmitted using the UDP  
port.  
The frame rate is limited by the [Max bit rate (per client)] setting.  
The actual frame rate may be lower than the specified value.  
*
Factory settings: Off  
<NOTE>  
• This setting is only enabled when [Transmission priority] is set to  
[Frame rate] or [Advanced VBR].  
• [H.264(1)] is fixed at 60 fps (for 60 Hz) and 50 fps (for 50 Hz).  
60 fps (for 60 Hz) and 50 fps (for 50 Hz) cannot be selected for  
[H.264(2)] to [H.264(4)].  
<NOTE>  
• When “On” is set, only “Unicast port (Port number settings: AUTO)”  
can be selected as the “Transmission type” setting.  
• When “On” is set, it takes a few seconds before the H.264 images  
are displayed.  
• When this is set to [On], H.264 images may not appear depending  
on the number of users accessing the unit at the same time and  
whether audio data exists.  
Burst tolerance level  
Select how much more than the [Max bit rate (per client)] value to  
allow for the H.264 bit rate.  
Setting value:  
• When this this set to [On], access will be limited to IPv4.  
High / Middle /Low  
Factory settings: Low  
<NOTE>  
• This setting is only enabled when [Transmission priority] is set to  
[Advanced VBR].  
Image capture size  
Select the resolution for H.264 images.  
Selectable options will vary depending on the selected resolution  
setting.  
Setting value:  
H264(1)  
H264(2)  
1920×1080  
1280×720  
Control time period  
Select the duration for which the H.264 bit rate will be controlled.  
Images will be transmitted so that the average transmission volume  
during the duration specified will be the bit rate specified in [Max bit  
rate (per client)].  
1920×1080  
1280×720  
640×360  
320×180  
160×90  
Setting value:  
1h  
1 hours  
H264(3)  
H264(4)  
1280×720  
640×360  
320×180  
160×90  
6h  
6 hours  
24h  
1 week  
1 day (24 hours)  
1 week  
1280×720  
640×360  
320×180  
160×90  
Factory settings: 24h  
<NOTE>  
• This setting is only enabled when [Transmission priority] is set to  
[Advanced VBR].  
Factory settings:  
H.264(1): 1920×1080  
H.264(2): 640×360  
H.264(3): 320×180  
H.264(4): 160×90  
Transmission priority  
Set the transmission mode for H.264 images.  
Setting value:  
Constant bit rate  
Transmits H.264 images at the bit rate specified  
in [Max bit rate (per client)].  
Frame rate  
Transmit H.264 images at the frame rate specified  
in [Framerate].  
Best effort  
Transmit H.264 images at  
a
variable bit rate  
between the maximum and minimum specified in  
[Max bit rate (per client)], according to the network  
bandwidth.  
Advanced VBR  
Transmit H.264 images at the frame rate specified  
in [Framerate]. Images will be transmitted so  
that the average transmission volume during the  
duration specified in [Control time period] will be  
the bit rate specified in [Max bit rate (per client)].  
Factory settings: Frame rate  
<NOTE>  
• When [Transmission priority] is set to [Frame rate] or [Advanced  
VBR], the number of users that can connect may decrease.  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Web screen configurations (continued)  
Max bit rate (per client)  
Transmission type  
Specify the H.264 bit rate per client.  
Select the transmission format for H.264 images.  
When [Transmission priority] is set to [Best effort], specify the  
maximum and minimum but rate.  
Setting value:  
Unicast port  
(AUTO)  
Up to 24 users can access a single camera at the  
same time.  
Setting value:  
1
64kbps/128kbps 1 /256kbps 1 /384kbps 1 /512kbps  
/
[Unicast port1 (Image)] and [Unicast port2  
(Audio)] will be configured automatically when  
images and audio are sent from the camera.  
We recommend selecting the [Unicast port  
(MANUAL)] setting when the port number  
transmitting the H.264 images does not need to  
be fixed (e.g., during use within a network).  
*
*
*
*
768kbps 1 /1024kbps 1 /1536kbps 1 /2048kbps 1 /3072kbps  
/
1
*
*
*
*
*
4096kbps 1 /6144kbps 1 /8192kbps 1 /10240kbps  
/
1
*
*
*
*
12288kbps 1 /14336kbps 1 /16384kbps 1 /20480kbps  
/
1
*
*
*
*
*
1
24576kbps  
Factory settings:  
H.264(1): 4096kbps  
H.264(2): 1536kbps  
H.264(3): 1024kbps  
H.264(4): 512kbps  
Unicast port  
(MANUAL)  
Up to 24 users can access a single camera at the  
same time.  
[Unicast port1 (Image)] and [Unicast port2  
(Audio)] must be configured manually when  
images and audio are sent from the camera.  
When transmitting H.264 images via the  
Internet, configure a fixed transmission port for  
the broadband router (hereafter referred to as  
"router") (→ page @@). For details, refer to the  
operating instructions for the router.  
The range of H.264 bit rates that can be specified varies depending  
on the resolution.  
• 160 × 90: 64kbps to 2048kbps  
• 320 × 180, 640 × 360: 64kbps to 4096kbps  
• 1280 × 720: 256kbps to 8192kbps  
• 1920 × 1080: 512kbps to 14336kbps  
• 1920 × 1080 (60fps), 1280 × 720 (60fps):  
1024kbps to 24576kbps  
Multicast port  
An unlimited number of users can access a single  
camera at the same time.  
When transmitting H.264 images via multicast,  
enter the [Multicast address], [Multicast port], and  
[Multicast TTL/HOPLimit].  
1
The H.264 bit rate is limited by the [Bandwidth control (bitrate)]  
(→ page @@) setting under the [Network] tab of the Network  
*
Factory settings: Unicast port (AUTO)  
<NOTE>  
screen. The actual bit rate may be lower than the specified value.  
• For details on the maximum number for simultaneous access, see  
page @@.  
Image quality  
Select the image quality for H.264 images.  
Setting value:  
Low(Motion priority) / Normal / Fine(Image quality priority)  
Factory settings: Normal  
1
Unicast port1 (Image)  
*
Enter the unicast port number (used when sending images from the  
unit).  
<NOTE>  
Usable port number range: 1024 to 50000  
• Only even numbers can be specified.  
• The port number cannot be set to 10670.  
Factory settings:  
• This setting is only enabled when [Transmission priority] (→ page  
@@) is set to [Constant bit rate] or [Best effort].  
Refresh interval  
Select the refresh interval for H.264 images (I-frame interval: 0.2 to 5  
seconds).  
If errors occur frequently in the network environment, decreasing the  
refresh interval will reduce image distortions.  
However, the frame rate may decrease.  
Setting value:  
H.264(1): 32004  
H.264(2): 32014  
H.264(3): 32024  
H.264(4): 32034  
1
The unicast port number must be configured when [Transmission  
type] is set to [Unicast port (MANUAL)].  
*
For 60Hz:  
1
Unicast port2 (Audio)  
0.2s / 0.25s / 0.33s / 0.5s / 1s / 2s / 3s / 4s / 5s  
For 50Hz:  
0.2s / 0.5s / 1s / 2s / 3s / 4s / 5s  
Factory settings: 1s  
*
Usable port number range: 1024 to 50000  
• Only even numbers can be specified.  
• The port number cannot be set to 10670.  
Factory settings:  
H.264(1): 32004  
H.264(2): 32014  
H.264(3): 32024  
H.264(4): 32034  
1
The unicast port number must be configured when [Transmission  
type] is set to [Unicast port (MANUAL)].  
*
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Web screen configurations (continued)  
2
Multicast address  
Audio  
*
Enter the multicast IP address.  
Images and audio will be sent to the specified IP address.  
Usable values:  
IPv4: 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255  
IPv6: Multicast address starting with FF.  
Factory settings:  
Configure audio settings.  
<NOTE>  
• Images and audio are not synchronized. Therefore, there may images  
and audio may be slightly out of sync.  
• The audio may skip depending on the network environment.  
H.264(1): 239.192.0.20  
H.264(2): 239.192.0.21  
H.264(3): 239.192.0.22  
H.264(4): 239.192.0.23  
<NOTE>  
• Verify usable multicast IP addresses before entering this setting.  
2
Multicast port  
*
Enter the multicast port number (used when sending images from the  
unit).  
Usable port number range: 1024 to 50000  
• Only even numbers can be specified.  
• The port number cannot be set to 10670.  
Factory settings: 37004  
Audio reception  
Set the communication mode used to transmit audio data between  
the unit and the computer.  
Setting value:  
<NOTE>  
• When sending audio from the unit, a port number with “1000” added  
to the multicast port number will be used.  
Off  
Do not transmit audio data between the unit and the computer.  
All settings and controls related to audio will be disabled.  
2
On  
The computer receives audio data from the unit. This allows  
images to be viewed on the computer with audio. Images and  
audio are not synchronized.  
Multicast TTL/HOP Limit  
*
Enter the TTL/HOPLimit value for multicast.  
Usable values: 1 to 254  
Factory settings: 16  
<NOTE>  
Factory settings: Off  
• When transmitting H.264 images via the Internet, transmitted  
images may not appear depending on proxy server settings, firewall  
settings, etc. In such cases, consult your network administrator.  
• When displaying multicast images on a computer with multiple  
LAN cards installed, disable the LAN cards that are not used for  
reception.  
Audio encoding format  
Select the compression format of the receiver.  
Currently, only AAC-LC (High quality) can be selected.  
Factory settings: AAC-LC (High quality)  
Audio bit rate  
Set the bit rate for transmitting audio.  
Setting value:  
64kbps / 96kbps / 128kbps  
Factory settings: 128kbps  
Mic input volume  
Set the volume of the audio from the unit when listening to it on the  
computer.  
Setting value:  
Mic High  
Set the volume to high. Use this when audio is input to  
the camera via a microphone.  
Mic Middle  
Mic Low  
Set the volume to medium. Use this when audio is input  
to the camera via a microphone.  
Set the volume to low. Use this when audio is input to  
the camera via a microphone.  
Line High  
Line Middle  
Line Low  
Set the volume to high. Use this when audio is input to  
the camera via line input.  
Set the volume to medium. Use this when audio is  
input to the camera via line input.  
Set the volume to low. Use this when audio is input to  
the camera via line input.  
Factory settings: Line Middle  
Mic input interval  
Currently, this setting is disabled.  
Plugin Power  
Turn plug-in power on/off.  
Off  
On  
Set plug-in power to on.  
Set plug-in power to off.  
<NOTE>  
• This is only enabled when [Mic input volume] is set to [Mic High],  
[Mic Middle], and [Mic Low].  
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Web screen configurations (continued)  
z Image adjust screen  
Adjust the image quality.  
Image / Position screen  
Display the image quality adjustment / preset position screen.  
To display the Image adjust screen, click the Setup button for [Image  
adjust] at the bottom of the Image/Position screen.  
Scene  
Switch the shooting mode depending on the shooting environment.  
Select a shooting mode based on the shooting conditions or  
preference.  
Select a shooting mode from the pull-down menu, and click the Set  
button to switch to the selected mode.  
Setting value:  
Scene1  
Scene2  
Scene3  
Scene4  
Modes that allow you to adjust detailed settings manually  
for various shooting conditions and preferences.  
Image adjust  
When you click the Setup button, the image quality adjustment screen  
appears. (→page @@)  
Brightness  
Preset position  
When you click the Setup button, the preset position screen appears.  
(→page @@)  
Picture Level  
Set the target picture level for auto exposure correction.  
This is enabled when any one of the following auto exposure  
correction functions is set to [Auto] or [ELC].  
• When [Iris] is set to [Auto]  
• When [Shutter Mode] is set to [ELC]  
• When [Gain] is set to [Auto]  
Setting range: -50 to +50  
Iris Mode  
Select whether to adjust the iris automatically or manually.  
Setting value:  
Manual  
Auto  
Adjust the iris manually.  
Exposure correction is performed automatically to match  
the target level specified in [Picture Level].  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Web screen configurations (continued)  
Shutter Mode  
Frame Mix  
Select for camera shutter speed.  
Select for frame addition (gain-up using sensor storage) amount.  
When frame addition is performed, it will appear as if the images are  
missing some frames.  
When a higher shutter speed is selected, fast-moving subjects do not  
become blurred easily but the images will be darker.  
Setting value:  
Setting value:  
Off  
The shutter is set to OFF.  
OFF  
6dB  
Frame addition is not performed.  
Step  
The step shutter is set (the steps can be changed).  
Set the frame addition amount to 6 dB.  
Set the frame addition amount to 12 dB.  
Set the frame addition amount to 18 dB.  
Set the frame addition amount to 24 dB.  
Synchro  
The synchro shutter is set (the setting can be changed  
continuously).  
12dB  
18dB  
24dB  
ELC  
The electronic shutter is controlled and the light quantity  
is adjusted automatically.  
• This cannot be configured when the format is 1080/29.97p,  
1080/23.98p, 1080/29.97PsF, 1080/23.98PsF, 1080/25p, or  
1080/25PsF.  
• The auto exposure correction and auto focus functions will be  
disabled when [Frame Mix] is set to [18dB] or [24dB]. (Only manual  
operation will be possible.)  
The shutter speeds that can be set are listed below.  
When 59.94 Hz has been set as the unit’s frequency  
When “Step” is  
selected as the  
“Shutter Mode”  
When “Synchro”  
is selected as the  
“Shutter Mode”  
<NOTE>  
For 59.94p/  
59.94i  
1/100, 1/120, 1/250,  
1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000,  
1/4000, 1/10000  
60.15Hz to 642.21Hz  
(255 steps)  
• Under discharge tube illumination, such as fluorescent and mercury-  
vapor lights, the brightness may change synchronously, colors may  
change, and horizontal stripes may flow up and down the image.  
In such cases, we recommend setting the electronic shutter speed  
to 1/100 in regions with 50 Hz power supply frequency, and to OFF  
in regions with 60 Hz power supply frequency.  
For 29.97p  
For 23.98p  
1/30, 1/60, 1/120, 1/250,  
1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000,  
1/4000, 1/10000  
1/24, 1/60, 1/120, 1/250,  
1/500, 1/1000, 1 /2000,  
1/4000, 1/10000  
ND Filter  
Set the transmittance of the lens’ built-in ND (neutral density) filter.  
Setting value:  
Through  
1/8  
Do not set ND filter.  
When 50 Hz has been set as the unit’s frequency  
Set ND filter transmittance to 1/8.  
Set ND filter transmittance to 1/64.  
When “Step” is  
selected as the  
“Shutter Mode”  
When “Synchro”  
is selected as the  
“Shutter Mode”  
1/64  
For 50p/ 50i  
For 25p  
1/60, 1/120, 1/250,  
1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000,  
1/4000, 1/10000  
50.15Hz to 535.71Hz  
(255 steps)  
Day/Night  
Switch between standard shooting and night-vision shooting (shooting  
with infrared light).  
Setting value:  
1/25, 1/60, 1/120, 1/250,  
1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000,  
1/4000, 1/10000  
Day  
Standard shooting (day mode)  
Night  
Night-vision shooting (night mode)  
For 23.98p  
1/24, 1/60, 1/120, 1/250,  
1/500, 1/1000, 1 /2000,  
1/4000, 1/10000  
Gain  
The image gain is adjusted here.  
In locations which are too dark, adjust the gain upward; conversely, in  
locations which are too bright, adjust it downward.  
Setting range: Auto, 0dB to 36dB  
When “Auto” is set, the light quantity is adjusted automatically.  
The noise increases when the gain is increased.  
AGC Max Gain  
When “Auto” is selected as the “Gain” setting, the maximum gain-up  
amount can be set.  
Setting value:  
6dB  
Set the maximum gain increase to 6 dB.  
Set the maximum gain increase to 12 dB.  
Set the maximum gain increase to 18 dB.  
12dB  
18dB  
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Web screen configurations (continued)  
Chroma Level  
Picture  
Set here is the color intensity (chroma level) of the images.  
Setting range: OFF, -99% to 40%  
White Balance Mode  
Set the white balance mode.  
Select the mode when the coloring is not natural because of the  
nature of the light source or other factors.  
If the white color serving as the reference can be recognized, subjects  
can be shot with natural coloring.  
Setting value:  
ATW  
In this mode, the white balance is compensated for  
automatically, even if changes occur in the light source or  
color temperature, by a process of continuous and automatic  
adjustment.  
AWB A  
AWB B  
When AWB A or AWB B is selected and the white balance is  
executed, the adjustment results obtained are stored in the  
memory selected.  
When AWB A or AWB B is then selected, the white balance  
stored in the selected memory can be recalled.  
3200K  
5600K  
VAR  
This is the white balance mode which is ideal when a 3200K  
halogen light is used as the light source.  
This is the white balance mode which is ideal when 5600K  
sunlight or fluorescent lighting is used as the light source.  
Specify a color temperature between 2000K and 15000K.  
AWB  
This is used to execute automatic white balance (AWB) to set the  
white balance. For further details, refer to page @@.  
Color Temperature  
Specify a color temperature between 2,000K and 15,000K.  
This is enabled when [White Balance Mode] is set to [VAR].  
Setting range: 2000K to 15000K  
R Gain  
This enables the R gain to be adjusted.  
Its setting takes effect when “AWB A” or “AWB B” has been selected  
as the “White Balance Mode” setting.  
Setting range: -150 to +150  
B Gain  
This enables the B gain to be adjusted.  
Its setting takes effect when “AWB A”, “AWB B” or “Var” has been  
selected as the “White Balance Mode” setting.  
Setting range: -150 to +150  
ABB  
This is used to execute automatic black balance (ABB) to set the  
black balance. For further details, refer to page @@.  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Web screen configurations (continued)  
Pedestal  
Gamma  
This item is used to adjust the black level (adjust the pedestal).  
These parts become darker when a negative setting is selected and,  
conversely, lighter when a positive setting is selected.  
Setting range: -150 to +150  
Adjust the gamma correction level.  
Specifying a lower value results in a subdued image. The gamma  
curve for low-brightness areas will be gentler, and contrast will be  
sharper.  
Specifying larger values results in an expanded gradient for dark  
areas and produces brighter images. The gamma curve for low-  
brightness areas will be steeper, and contrast will be softer.  
Setting range: 0.30 to 0.75  
R Pedestal  
This enables the R pedestal to be adjusted.  
The same R pedestal setting is used for all the scenes.  
Setting range: -100 to +100  
DRS  
B Pedestal  
Set the DRS function which performs correction when video with high  
light/dark contrast is displayed.  
You can select from a [Low], [Mid], or [High] effect level.  
Depending on the scene, noise may worsen.  
Setting value:  
This enables the B pedestal to be adjusted.  
The same B pedestal setting is used for all the scenes.  
Setting range: -100 to +100  
Detail  
Off  
Turn the DRS function off.  
Turn outline (i.e., image sharpness) adjustment on/off.  
Setting value:  
Low  
Mid  
High  
Set the DRS function effect level to low.  
Set the DRS function effect level to medium.  
Set the DRS function effect level to high.  
Off  
On  
Do not adjust outlines in the image.  
Sharpen the outlines in the image.  
<NOTE>  
• When DRS is enabled, knee settings (Knee Mode, Knee Point,  
Knee Slope) and Gamma Type and Gamma settings are disabled.  
Master Detail  
Perform outline (i.e., image sharpness) adjustment.  
Higher values result in increased sharpness in outlines.  
Setting range: 0 to 62  
Knee Mode  
Set the operating mode for gradation compression (knee).  
Setting value:  
V Detail Level  
Off  
Turn the knee function off.  
This is selected to adjust the vertical detail compensation level when  
“High” has been selected as the “Detail” setting.  
Setting range: -7 to +7  
Auto  
Enable the knee function, and set the knee point and knee  
slope automatically.  
Manual  
Enable the knee function, and set the knee point and knee  
slope manually.  
Detail Band  
This is selected to set the boost frequency for Detail.  
Setting range: -7(Low frequency) to +7 (High frequency)  
Higher frequencies result in a more detailed effect applied to the  
subject.  
Knee Point  
Set the compression level (knee point) position for high-brightness  
video signals.  
This is only enabled when [Knee Mode] is set to [Manual].  
Setting range: 70.0% to 107.0%  
Noise Suppress  
This is selected to reduce the screen noise which is generated by the  
detail effect.  
The higher the settings, the more the noise is reduced.  
Setting range: 0 to 60  
Knee Slope  
Set the knee slope.  
This is only enabled when [Knee Mode] is set to [Manual].  
Setting range: 0 to 99  
<NOTE>  
Flesh Tone Noise SUP  
This function is selected to make the skin of the subjects to be shot  
appear to be smoother and more attractive.  
When “High” is selected, the effect is enhanced.  
Setting range: 0 to 31  
• When [DRS] is enabled, the knee setting is disabled.  
White Clip  
Turn the white clip function off/on.  
Setting value:  
Gamma Type  
Select the type of gamma curve.  
Setting value:  
Off  
On  
Turn the white clip function off.  
Turn the white clip function on.  
HD  
HD (High Definition) video gamma characteristic.  
Gain in darks areas is higher than in HD gamma.  
SD  
White Clip Level  
Set the white clip level.  
This is only enabled when [White Clip] is set to [On].  
Setting range: 90% to 109%  
FILMLIKE1  
Characteristic capable of reproducing better gradation in  
highlights than HD gamma.  
FILMLIKE2  
FILMLIKE3  
Characteristic capable of reproducing better gradation in  
highlights than [FILMLIKE1].  
<NOTE>  
• When [Knee Mode] is set to [Auto] and the white clip value is  
changed, the knee value will also change.  
Characteristic capable of reproducing better gradation in  
highlights than [FILMLIKE2].  
DNR  
Set the digital noise reduction level for outputting bright, clear images  
without noise, even at night and low-light conditions.  
Selecting [Low] or [High] removes noise.  
However, image lag may increase.  
Setting value:  
Off  
Turn the DNR function off.  
Low  
High  
Turn the DNR function on (low).  
Turn the DNR function on (high).  
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Web screen configurations (continued)  
z Matrix Settings screen  
Matrix Type  
Set matrix settings.  
Select the type of color matrix.  
To display the Matrix Settings screen, click the Setup button for [Matrix  
Type] at the bottom of the Image/Position screen.  
Setting value:  
Normal  
EBU  
Load preset color matrix data, and perform saturation and  
hue adjustment.  
NTSC  
User  
Adjust the [Linear Matrix] and [Color Correction] values.  
Linear Matrix  
This is enabled when the matrix type is set to [User].  
Setting value:  
R-G  
R-B  
G-R  
G-B  
B-R  
B-G  
Adjust the color to between –63 to +63 for each axis  
direction.  
Color Correction  
Adjust the saturation and hue.  
Saturation  
Adjust the saturation for each color.  
Setting range: -63 to +63  
Phase  
Adjust the hue for each color.  
Setting range: -63 to +63  
B_Mg  
Mg  
Color between blue and magenta  
Magenta  
Mg_R  
Mg_R_R  
R
Color between magenta and red  
Color with a 1:3 magenta to red ratio  
Red  
R_R_YI  
R_Yl  
R_Yl_Yl  
Yl  
Color with a 1:3 magenta to red ratio  
Color between red and yellow  
Color with a 1:3 magenta to red ratio  
Yellow  
Yl_G  
G
Color between yellow and green  
Green  
G_Cy  
Cy  
Green and cyan  
Cyan  
Cy_B  
B
Cyan and blue  
Blue  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Web screen configurations (continued)  
zPreset position screen  
Zoom  
Adjust the image quality.  
To display the Image adjust screen, click the Setup button for [Preset  
position] at the bottom of the Image/Position screen.  
Use this to adjust the zoom (magnification) in the Wide  
direction.  
(-)  
(×1.0)  
(+)  
Use this to adjust the zoom (magnification) to 1.0x.  
Use this to adjust the zoom (magnification) in the Tele  
direction.  
Use this to enable or disable the digital zoom.  
(D. Zoom)  
(D. Ext)  
Enable or disable the digital extender.  
This operates only when digital zoom is disabled.  
Focus  
Use this to adjust the focus in the Near direction.  
It does not work during automatic adjustments.  
(Near)  
(O.T. AF)  
(Far)  
When this is pressed while the focus is being adjusted  
manually, the focus will be temporarily adjusted  
automatically. It does not work during automatic  
adjustments.  
Use this to adjust the focus in the Far direction.  
It does not work during automatic adjustments.  
Use this to switch between auto and manual focusing.  
(Auto)  
Brightness  
Use this to make the image darker.  
It does not work during automatic adjustments.  
(-)  
(+)  
Use this to make the image lighter.  
It does not work during automatic adjustments.  
Use this to switch the picture brightness adjustment  
between auto and manual.  
(Auto)  
Control pad and its buttons  
To adjust the image in the horizontal or vertical  
direction (panning or tilting), left-click the pad and the  
buttons.  
The more the outside of the pad is clicked, the faster  
the camera operates.  
Preset  
Adjustment is also possible by dragging the mouse.  
Right-click the pad to initiate zooming and focusing.  
When the top half of the pad is clicked in the up or  
down direction, the zoom (magnification) is adjusted  
in the Tele direction; conversely, when the bottom half  
of the pad is clicked, the zoom is adjusted in the Wide  
direction.  
When the left half of the pad is clicked in the left or right  
direction, the focus is adjusted in the Near direction;  
conversely when the right half of the pad is clicked, the  
focus is adjusted in the Far direction. The zooming can  
also be adjusted by operating the mouse wheel.  
This selects the preset position to be operated from the pull-down  
menu.  
This is used to register the current status in the preset  
position now selected on the pull-down menu.  
It does not function if “Home” has been selected on the  
(Set)  
pull-down menu.  
The camera direction moves to the preset position which is  
now selected on the pull-down menu.  
The settings that are reproduced at this position are the  
settings which were established on the “Preset Scope”  
menu (→ page @@, page @@).  
The camera direction moves to the home position if  
“Home” has been selected on the pull-down menu.  
<NOTE>  
• When the mouse is used for dragging and dropping from the control  
pad area to a position outside this area, the panning, tilting and  
other operations will not stop.  
(Move)  
In a case like this, click the control pad area to stop these  
operations.  
This is used to delete the preset position setting which is  
currently being selected.  
It does not function if “Home” has been selected on the  
pull-down menu.  
(Delete)  
Speed  
Use this to select the speed at which the pan, tilt, zoom  
and focus operations are to be performed.  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Web screen configurations (continued)  
Speed With Zoom POS.  
Limitation Setting  
“Off” or “On” is set here for the function used to adjust the pan-tilt  
adjustment speed in conjunction with the zoom magnification.  
Setting value:  
This establishes the up, down, left and right limit settings of the pan-  
tilt head.  
First, move the pan-tilt head to the position where the limit is to be  
set, and press the corresponding button below to set the direction (up,  
down, left or right) in which the limit is to be set.  
After each setting has been selected, press the Set button to enter  
the setting.  
The panning and tilting operations will not become slower in the  
zoom status.  
Off  
The panning and tilting operations will become slower in the  
On  
zoom status.  
This function has no effect during preset operations.  
Use this to save the current position as the upward  
Tilt Up  
limit.  
Use this to save the current position as the downward  
Tilt Down  
limit.  
Focus ADJ With PTZ.  
“Off” or “On” is set here for the function which compensates for out-of-  
focusing when it occurs during panning, tilting or zooming operations.  
Setting value:  
Use this to save the current position as the leftward  
Pan Left  
limit.  
Use this to save the current position as the rightward  
Pan Right  
limit.  
Off  
On  
Out-of-focusing is not compensated.  
Out-of-focusing is compensated.  
Use this to enable or disable the limit setting in each  
Set/Release  
direction.  
When “Off” is set, adjust the focus as required after zooming or set  
the focus to the auto mode.  
This item can be selected only when “Manual” has been selected as  
the “Focus Mode” setting.  
Preset Setting  
Preset Speed Table  
Set the preset speed table (Slow, Fast).  
During preset playback, presets are performed at [Preset Speed] (1 to  
30) values that are based on the table set here.  
Setting value:  
Slow  
Fast  
Set the preset speed table to slow.  
Set the preset speed table to fast.  
Preset Speed  
Set the pan/tilt movement speed used when recalling camera  
orientation information registered to the preset memory (30 steps).  
Setting range: 1 to 30  
<NOTE>  
• When you set large Preset Speed values, the image may sway  
when the movement stops.  
• When [Preset Speed Table] is set to [Fast], [Preset Speed] values  
equivalent to the AW-HE120 will be applied.  
Preset Scope  
Selected here are the setting items to be recalled when the contents  
of the preset memory are regenerated.  
Setting value:  
Pan, Tilt, Zoom (including digital zoom), Focus, Iris, Gain,  
white balance adjustment value  
Mode A  
Mode B  
Mode C  
Pan, Tilt, Zoom (including digital zoom), Focus, Iris  
Pan, Tilt, Zoom (including digital zoom), Focus  
Freeze During Preset  
Turn the function for freezing images during preset playback off/on.  
When this is set to [On], preset playback is performed with a still  
of the image immediately preceding the start of preset playback  
being output. The image freeze is released when preset playback is  
finished.  
Setting value:  
Off  
On  
Do not freezing images during preset playback.  
Freeze images during preset playback.  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Web screen configurations (continued)  
zOutput  
System screen  
This item’s setting is reflected when the Set button is pressed.  
This menu has items that relate to the genlock phase adjustment and  
camera’s output image settings.  
Format  
The video format is changed on this screen.  
For 480/59.94p(i) and 576/50p(i), P signals are output for HDMI, while  
I signals are output for SDI and analog component outputs.  
Setting value:  
For 59.94Hz:  
1080/59.94p, 1080/29.97p, 1080/23.98p, 1080/59.94i,  
1080/29.97PsF, 1080/23.98PsF, 720/59.94p, 480/59.94p(i)  
For 50Hz:  
1080/50p, 1080/25p, 1080/50i, 180/25PsF, 720/50p, 576/50p(i)  
<NOTE>  
• When you switch from an HD format to an SD format or vice versa,  
the unit automatically restarts after the Format Set screen appears.  
Down CONV. Mode  
The down-conversion mode is selected here.  
Setting value:  
Use this when the aspect ratio of the monitor is 16:9.  
When the 4:3 aspect ratio has been set for the monitor  
screen, the images are squeezed horizontally and  
extended vertically changing the view of the angle.  
Squeeze  
Use this when the aspect ratio of the monitor is 4:3. With  
the vertical height serving as the reference, the parts  
which extend beyond this at the two sides are cropped  
changing the view of the angle.  
SideCut  
Use this when the aspect ratio of the monitor is 4:3. With  
the horizontal width serving as the reference, black bands  
are added at the top and bottom changing the view of the  
angle.  
LetterBox  
HDMI Color  
Set here is the HDMI color output.  
RGB-NOR / RGB-ENH / YCbCr422 / YCbCr444  
• When an HDMI monitor is used, use “YCbCr422” under normal  
circumstances.  
• In cases where, for instance, HDMI (RGB) signals are converted  
and output to a DVI monitor, the settings required will differ  
depending on the color gradation supported by the monitor.  
The RGB output signals are output in the 16 to 235  
zGenlock  
This item’s setting is reflected immediately.  
RGB-NOR  
range.  
The RGB output signals are output in the 0 to 255  
RGB-ENH  
range.  
Horizontal Phase  
This is used to adjust the horizontal phase during genlock.  
Setting range: -206 to +49  
• If the black parts of the images appear overexposed when “RGB-  
NOR” has been selected, use the “RGB-ENH” setting instead.  
• Conversely, if the images are displayed with a loss of dark detail  
when “RGB-ENH” has been selected, use the “RGB-NOR” setting  
instead.  
<NOTE>  
• The horizontal phases of the HD and SD signals cannot be adjusted  
separately.  
Neither is it possible to adjust the chroma phase of the VIDEO OUT  
signals. The free run setting is used.  
<NOTE>  
• If an HDMI Color setting which is not supported by the monitor  
has been specified, the HDMI Color setting may be changed  
automatically. (The menu display will remain unchanged.)  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Web screen configurations (continued)  
Frequency  
Preset Scope  
This item is selected to switch the frame frequency.  
Setting value:  
59.94Hz / 50Hz  
Selected here are the setting items to be recalled when the contents  
of the preset memory are regenerated.  
Setting value:  
• When the frequency is switched, “Format” is set as follows.  
Pan, Tilt, Zoom (including digital zoom), Focus, Iris, Gain,  
white balance adjustment value  
Mode A  
59.94Hz  
1080/59.94p  
1080/29.97p  
1080/23.98p  
1080/59.94i  
1080/29.97PsF  
1080/23.98PsF  
720/59.94p  
50Hz  
Mode B  
Mode C  
Pan, Tilt, Zoom (including digital zoom), Focus, Iris  
Pan, Tilt, Zoom (including digital zoom), Focus  
1080/50p  
1080/25p  
1080/25p  
1080/50i  
Freeze During Preset  
1080/25PsF  
1080/25PsF  
720/50p  
Turn the function for freezing images during preset playback off/on.  
When this is set to [On], preset playback is performed with a still  
of the image immediately preceding the start of preset playback  
being output. The image freeze is released when preset playback is  
finished.  
480/59.94p(i)  
576/50p(i)  
Setting value:  
Off  
On  
Do not freezing images during preset playback.  
Freeze images during preset playback.  
Color Bars Setup  
This is only enabled when “Frequency” is set to “59.94Hz”.  
Select the color bar setup level (Off: 0.0IRE, On: 7.5IRE) for the  
VIDEO OUT signal.  
Speed With Zoom POS.  
Setting value:  
“Off” or “On” is set here for the function used to adjust the pan-tilt  
adjustment speed in conjunction with the zoom magnification.  
When “On” is set, the panning and tilting operations will become  
slower in the zoom status.  
Off  
On  
0.0IRE  
7.5IRE  
This function has no effect during preset operations.  
Setting value:  
z Other  
This item’s setting is reflected when the Set button is pressed.  
Off  
Do not adjust the panning and tilting speed in the zoom status.  
Install Position  
“Desktop” or “Hanging” is selected here as the method used to install  
The panning and tilting operations will become slower in the  
zoom status.  
On  
the unit.  
Setting value:  
Focus Mode  
Desktop  
Hanging  
Stand-alone installation  
Suspended installation  
Select auto or manual mode for the focus adjustment function.  
Setting value:  
Auto  
Always adjust focus automatically.  
Adjust focus manually.  
• When “Hanging” has been selected, the top, bottom, left and right  
of the images will be reversed, and up/down/left/right control for  
panning and tilting will also be reversed.  
Manual  
Focus ADJ With PTZ.  
Smart Picture Flip  
“Off” or “On” is set here for the function which compensates for out-of-  
focusing when it occurs during panning, tilting or zooming operations.  
When “Off” is set, adjust the focus as required after zooming or set  
the focus to the auto mode.  
This item can be selected only when “Manual” has been selected as  
the “Focus Mode” setting.  
When this is set to [Auto] and the tilt becomes the angle set for  
[Flip DetectAngle], the image will be flipped in the vertical direction  
automatically.  
Setting value:  
Off  
Does not flip the image vertically.  
Auto  
When the tilt becomes the angle set for [Flip DetectAngle], the  
image will be flipped in the vertical direction automatically.  
Setting value:  
Off  
On  
Out-of-focusing is not compensated.  
Out-of-focusing is compensated.  
Flip Detect Angle  
Set the tilt angle at which the image will be flipped in the vertical  
direction automatically when [Smart Picture Flip] is set to [Auto].  
Setting range: 60° to 120°  
Digital Zoom  
“Enable” or “Disable” is set here for the digital zoom function.  
If zooming is performed toward the Tele end beyond the maximum  
position when “Enable” has been selected, the digital zoom can be  
operated continuously. Zooming will stop temporarily at the position  
where the optical zoom and digital zoom are switched so after it has  
stopped at this position, proceed with zooming again.  
When the setting is changed to “Disable” while already in the digital  
zoom region, the zoom will automatically move to the maximum  
position of the optical zoom.  
Preset Speed Table  
Set the preset speed table (Slow, Fast).  
During preset playback, presets are performed at [Preset Speed] (1 to  
30) values that are based on the table set here.  
Setting value:  
Slow Set the preset speed table to slow.  
Fast  
Set the preset speed table to fast.  
Setting value:  
Disable  
Enable  
Disable the digital zoom function.  
Enable the digital zoom function.  
Preset Speed  
Set the pan/tilt movement speed used when recalling camera  
orientation information registered to the preset memory (30 steps).  
Setting range: 1 to 30  
The digital zoom is set to off when color bars are displayed during  
digital zooming.  
• When you set large Preset Speed values, the image may sway  
when the movement stops.  
• When [Preset Speed Table] is set to [Fast], [Preset Speed] values  
equivalent to the AW-HE120 will be applied.  
Max Digital Zoom  
Set the maximum digital zoom magnification.  
Setting value:  
x2 / x3 / x4 / x5 / x6 / x7 / x8 / x9 / x10  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Web screen configurations (continued)  
Digital Extender  
Multi-Screen setup screen  
Enable or disable the digital extender.  
When this is set to [On], the digital zoom will be fixed at 1.4x.  
When [Digital Zoom] is set to [Enable], [Digital Extender] is disabled.  
Setting value:  
The cameras whose images are to be displayed on the multi screen are  
set here. (→page@@, page @@)  
Off  
On  
Disable the digital extender function.  
Enable the digital extender function.  
Tally  
“Enable” or “Disable” is set here for the function which turns on or  
turns off the tally lamp using the tally control signal.  
Setting value:  
Disable  
Enable  
Disable the tally lamp function.  
Enable the tally lamp function.  
Tally Brightness  
Adjust the brightness of the tally LED.  
Setting value:  
Low  
Mid  
Low brightness  
Medium brightness  
High brightness  
High  
<NOTE>  
• When this is set to [Low], the LED brightness is equivalent to that of  
the AW-HE120.  
OSD Mix  
Select whether to turn off/on camera menu, status, and other displays  
for each output image.  
Setting value:  
Off / On  
IP address  
Input here the IP address of the camera whose images are to be  
displayed on the multi screen or the host name. With one group  
consisting of 4 cameras, up to four groups of cameras (a total of 16  
cameras) can be registered.  
Input as follows if the HTTP port number of the camera whose images  
are to be displayed has been changed.  
SDI Out  
HDMI Out  
Video Out  
IP  
When this is set to [On], the camera menu, status, and other displays  
IPv4 address entry  
example  
http://192.168.0.10:8080  
for corresponding output image are displayed.  
Setting value:  
Off / On  
<NOTE>  
IPv6 address entry  
example  
http://[2001:db8:0:0:0:0:0:1]:8080  
• When this is set to [Off], the camera menu can be displayed for  
about 1 minute after the unit is turned on.  
Enter the following when connecting via HTTPS.  
Example of  
input  
https://192.168.0.10/  
OSD Off With Tally  
Enable or disable the function that turns off camera menu, status,  
and other displays when tally signals are received via commands or  
contacts.  
Maximum  
number of  
characters  
1 to 128 half-size characters  
When the tally signal releases, the camera menu display will return.  
Setting value:  
Off / On  
Factory settings:  
Cam 1: selfcamera  
Cam 2 to Cam 16: Not registered  
<NOTE>  
OSD Status  
Turn the status display during AWB and ABB on/off.  
• When connecting via HTTPS, install the security certificate for the  
camera to be displayed. (→page @@)  
Setting value:  
Off / On  
• This unit is configured for cameras for which “selfcamera” is  
displayed for the IP address or host name.  
• When configuring a host name, the DNS settings of the computer  
that will display the multi screen must be configured. For details on  
the computer’s DNS settings, consult your network administrator.  
Model Select  
Set the protocol model for standard serial communication.  
Do not select [Reserved1] to [Reserved7].  
Appears when the service switch (SW4) at the bottom of the unit is  
set to ON (standard serial communication).  
Setting value:  
SEVIHD1 / SBRC300 / SBRCZ330 / Reserved1 to 7  
86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Web screen configurations (continued)  
Camera title  
User mng. screen  
Input the camera title here. The camera title which has been input is  
The users and computers (IP addresses) that can access the unit from  
computers and mobile terminals are registered in the User mng. screen.  
The User mng. screen consists of three tabs, “User auth.”, “Host auth.”  
and “Priority Stream”.  
displayed on the multi screen.  
Maximum  
number of  
characters  
0 to 20 half-size characters  
Symbols  
Invalid  
User auth. screen  
characters  
Click the User auth. tab of User mng. screen. (→page @@, page @@)  
Configure the user authorization settings for the computers and mobile  
terminals that can access the unit.  
Factory settings:  
Cam 1: The product number appears.  
Cam 2 to Cam 16: blank  
Up to 24 users can be registered.  
<NOTE>  
• If user authentication fails more than 8 times within a 30-second  
period from the same IP address (computer), access to the unit will be  
disabled for a certain period.  
<NOTE>  
• When a 16-screen multi screen is selected, camera titles may be  
only partially displayed.  
• Multi screen displays are displayed in 4:3 aspect ratio.  
User auth.  
User authorization is set to “On” or “Off” here.  
Setting value:  
On  
Off  
Perform user authentication.  
Do not perform user authentication.  
Factory settings:Off  
Authentication [Digest or Basic, Digest, Basic]  
Specify the method of user authentication to use.  
Use digest authentication or basic authentication.  
Setting value:  
Digest or Basic Use digest authentication or basic authentication.  
Digest  
Basic  
Use digest authentication.  
Use basic authentication.  
Factory settings: Digest or Basic  
<NOTE>  
• If you change the [Authentication] setting, close the browser and  
perform access again.  
User name  
Input the user name.  
Maximum  
number of  
characters  
1 to 32 half-size characters  
Invalid  
" & : ; ¥  
characters  
Factory settings: blank  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Web screen configurations (continued)  
Password / Retype password  
Input the password.  
Host auth. screen  
Click the Host auth. tab of User mng. screen. (→page@@, page @@)  
Configure the host authorization settings that restrict the computers (IP  
addresses) that can access the unit.  
Maximum  
number of  
characters  
4 to 32 half-size characters  
Invalid  
" &  
characters  
Factory settings: blank  
<NOTE>  
• If you enter a new name for a registered user and click the Set  
button, the user information will be overwritten.  
Access level  
Select one of the following settings as the user access level.  
Setting value:  
This access level allows the user to perform all  
the unit’s operations.  
1. Administrator  
Host auth. [On, Off]  
Host authorization is set to “On” or “Off” here.  
Setting value:  
This access level allows only Live screen  
operations to be performed. The unit cannot be  
set.  
2. Camera control  
3. Live only  
On  
Off  
Perform host authentication.  
This access level enables only Live screen to be  
displayed. The unit cannot be operated or set.  
Do not perform host authentication.  
Factory settings: Off  
Factory settings: 3. Live only  
IP address  
User check  
The IP address of the personal computer from which access to the  
camera is allowed is input here. The host name cannot be input as  
the IP address.  
You can view registered users by clicking [▼] for [User check].  
A registered user is indicated in the form of “Registered user name  
[Access level]”. (Example: admin[1])  
You can delete selected users by clicking the [Delete] button at the  
right.  
<NOTE>  
• When the “IP address/subnet mask length” is input, the personal  
computers which are allowed to access the camera can be  
restricted on a subnet by subnet basis.  
If, for instance, “192.168.0.1/24” has been input and the “2. Camera  
control” setting has been selected as the access level setting, the  
personal computers from “192.168.0.1” to “192.168.0.254” will be  
able to access the camera at the “2. Camera control” access level.  
• When an already registered IP address is input and the Set button is  
clicked, the host information will be overwritten.  
Access level  
Select one of the following settings as the host access level.  
Setting value:  
This access level allows the user to perform all  
the unit’s operations.  
1. Administrator  
This access level allows only Live screen  
2. Camera control  
3. Live only  
operations to be performed. The unit cannot be  
set.  
This access level enables only Live screen to be  
displayed. The unit cannot be operated or set.  
Factory settings: 3. Live only  
Host check  
You can view registered host IP addresses by clicking [▼] for [Host  
check].  
A host is indicated in the form of “Registered IP address [Access  
level]”. (Example: 192.168.0.21 [1])  
You can delete selected hosts (IP addresses) by clicking the [Delete]  
button at the right.  
88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Web screen configurations (continued)  
Priority stream screen  
Network setup screen  
Click the Priority stream tab of User mng. screen. (→page@@, page  
@@)  
Configure network settings in the Network setup screen.  
The Network setup screen consists of the two tabs of “Network” and  
“Advanced”.  
Selected on this screen are the settings for the priority stream which  
enables the images to be sent with no reduction in image quality  
or image refresh speed even when a multiple number of users are  
accessing the unit at the same time.  
Network setup screen  
Click the “Network” tab of the Network setup screen. (→page@@, page  
@@)  
zPriority Stream  
Activation [On, Off]  
Whether to use priority stream transmission is set here using “On” or  
“Off”.  
Setting value:  
On  
Off  
Use priority stream transmission.  
Do not use priority stream transmission.  
Factory settings: Off  
<NOTE>  
• When [Activation] is set to [On], the number of users that can  
access the unit may be restricted.  
Destination IP address (1)  
The IP address of the first send destination is input here.  
Destination IP address (2)  
The IP address of the second send destination is input here.  
Stream Type  
Select the stream type  
Setting value:  
The following information is required to configure network settings.  
Consult your network administrator or Internet service provider.  
• IP address  
JPEG(1)  
JPEG(2)  
JPEG(3)  
JPEG(1) images are sent.  
JPEG(2) images are sent.  
JPEG(3) images are sent.  
• Subnet mask  
• Default gateway (when using a gateway server or router)  
• HTTP port  
• DNS primary and secondary server addresses (when using DNS)  
H.264(1) images are sent.  
H.264(2) images are sent.  
H.264(3) images are sent.  
H.264(4) images are sent.  
H.264(1)  
H.264(2)  
H.264(3)  
H.264(4)  
Factory settings: JPEG(1)  
<NOTE>  
• When [Transmission priority] (→ page @@) is set to [Best effort] for  
[H.264], transmissions will occur at a variable bit rate between the  
maximum and minimum bit rate depending on the connection status  
of the other users.  
Refresh interval  
Select the frame rate.  
This is enabled only when [Stream Type] is set to [JPEG(1)],  
[JPEG(2)], or [JPEG(3)].  
Setting value:  
For 60Hz:  
1
*
1fp / 2fps / 3fps / 5fps / 6fps / 10fps / 15fps 1 / 30fps  
*
*
*
For 50Hz:  
1fps/2fps/5fps/10fps /12.5fps 1 /25fps  
Factory settings: 1 fps  
1
*
*
*
1
When [H.264 transmission] is set to [On], the frame rate may be  
slower than the specified value in some cases.  
*
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Web screen configurations (continued)  
z IPv4 network  
z IPv6 network  
Network Settings  
Manual  
Select the method in which the IP address is configured.  
Enable or disable manual configuration of the IPv6 address.  
Setting value:  
Setting value:  
Enter the IP address in the [IP address(IPv4)]  
On  
Off  
Enter the IPv6 address manually.  
Static  
field.  
Disable manual entry of the IPv6 address.  
Use the DHCP function to configure the IP  
address.  
DHCP  
Factory settings: Off  
Use the DHCP function to configure the IP  
address. If the DHCP server cannot be found,  
the IP address will be configured automatically.  
IP address (IPv6)  
When [Manual] is set to [On], the IPv6 address must be entered  
Auto(AutoIP)  
manually.  
Use the DHCP function to browse network  
address information, and configure an unused  
IP address for the camera as a fixed IP address.  
The IP address configured will be automatically  
determined by the camera from within the subnet  
mask range. If the DHCP server cannot be  
found, the IP address will be set to 192.168.0.10.  
Be sure to enter an address unique from other devices.  
<NOTE>  
• When connecting to the manually specified IP address through a  
router, use an IPv6-compatible router, and enable the automatic  
configuration function for the IPv6 address. Be sure to configure  
an IPv6 address that includes the prefix information provided  
by the IPv6-compatible router. For details, refer to the operating  
instructions for the router.  
Auto(Advanced)  
Factory settings: Auto(Advanced)  
<NOTE>  
Default gateway  
• If the DHCP server cannot obtain an IP address with [Auto (AutoIP)],  
search for an IP address between 169.254.1.0 to 169.254.254.255  
on the same network, and configure the IP address.  
When [Manual] is set to [On] for [IPv6 network], enter the default  
gateway for the unit’s IPv6 network.  
Factory settings: blank  
IP address (IPv4)  
DHCPv6  
Input the unit’s IP address here when the DHCP function is not  
going to be used. Input an address that will not duplicate an existing  
IP address which has been set for a personal computer or another  
network camera.  
Enable or disable use of the IPv6 DHCP function.  
Configure the DHCP server so that the same IP address is not  
configured for a computer that does not use the DHCP function and  
other network cameras. For details on server settings, consult your  
network administrator.  
Factory settings: 192.168.0.10  
Setting value:  
<NOTE>  
On  
Off  
Use the IPv6 DHCP function.  
• Multiple IP addresses cannot be used even when the DHCP  
function is used. For details on the DHCP server settings, consult  
your network administrator.  
Do not use the IPv6 DHCP function.  
Factory settings: Off  
Subnet Mask  
Primary DNS server address  
Input the unit’s subnet mask here if the DHCP function is not going to  
Secondary DNS server address  
Enter the IPv6 address of the DNS server.  
For details on the IPv6 address of the DNS server, consult your  
system administrator.  
be used.  
Factory settings: 255.255.255.0  
Default gateway  
Input the unit’s default gateway if the DHCP function is not going to  
be used.  
z Common (to IPv6/IPv4)  
Factory settings: 192.168.0.1  
<NOTE>  
HTTP port  
Port numbers are allocated separately.  
Setting range: 1 to 65535  
The following port numbers are used by the unit so they cannot be  
used.  
• Multiple IP addresses cannot be used for the default gateway even  
when the DHCP function is used.  
For details on the DHCP server settings, consult your network  
administrator.  
20, 21, 23, 25, 42, 53, 67, 68, 69, 110, 123, 161, 162, 443, 554, 995,  
10669, 10670, 59000 to 61000  
Factory settings: 80  
DNS  
Whether the DNS server address is to be acquired automatically  
(Auto) or manually (Manual) is input here.  
Line speed  
If “Manual” has been selected, the DNS settings must be established.  
If “Auto” is selected when the DHCP function is going to be used, the  
DNS server address is acquired automatically.  
For further details, consult your system administrator.  
Factory settings: Auto  
Select one of the following data line speeds. Normally, it is  
recommended that the “Auto” default setting be used.  
Setting value:  
Auto  
The line speed is set automatically.  
100 Mbps full duplex  
100 M-Full  
100 M-Half  
10 M-Full  
10 M-Half  
Primary server address  
Secondary server address  
Input the IP address of the DNS server if the “Manual” setting has  
been selected for “DNS”.  
100 Mbps half duplex  
10 Mbps full duplex  
10 Mbps half duplex  
For details on the IP address of the DNS server, consult your system  
administrator.  
Factory settings: Auto  
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Web screen configurations (continued)  
Max RTP packet size  
Easy IP Setup accommodate period  
Select “20min” or “Unlimited” as the time for enabling the operation of  
the network settings from the Easy IP Setup Software.  
Setting value:  
Specify whether to limit the size of RTP packets sent from the camera  
when using RTP to view camera images.  
Setting value:  
Unlimited (1500byte)  
Limited (1280byte)  
Unlimited (1500byte)  
Limited (1280byte)  
The setting operations from the Easy IP Setup  
Software are enabled for 20 minutes after the  
camera has started operating.  
20min  
Factory settings: Unlimited (1500byte)  
The setting operations from the Easy IP Setup  
Software are enabled at all times.  
Unlimited  
Normally, it is recommended that the “Unlimited(1500byte)” setting be  
used.  
Select “Limited(1280byte)” when the packet size of the used  
communication line is limited. For details on the maximum packet size  
of communication lines, consult your network administrator.  
Factory settings: 20min  
<NOTE>  
• The camera screen can be opened because the camera display in  
the Easy IP Setup Software is constantly enabled.  
• For details on the address settings of each server, consult your  
network administrator.  
• The port forwarding function converts a global IP address to a  
private IP address, and includes “static IP masquerade” and  
“network address translation (NAT)”. This function is set to the  
router.  
• To access the camera via the Internet after connecting it to a router,  
it will be necessary to set an individual HTTP port No. for each  
network camera and to convert the address using the router’s port  
forwarding function. For details, refer to the operating instructions  
for the router.  
HTTP max segment size (MSS)  
Select whether to limit the maximum segment size (MSS) transmitted  
by a camera when viewing camera images using HTTP.  
Setting value:  
Unlimited (1460byte)  
Limited (1280byte)  
Limited (1024byte)  
Unlimited (1460byte)  
Limited (1280byte)  
Limited (1024byte)  
Factory settings: Unlimited (1460byte)  
Normally, it is recommended that the default setting be used.  
Select “Limited(1024byte)”/”Limited(1280byte” when the maximum  
segment size (MSS) of the used communication line is limited. For  
details on the maximum segment size (MSS) of communication lines,  
consult your network administrator.  
LAN private address  
192.168.0.254  
WAN global address  
vvv.xxx.yyy.zzz  
Enter "<global address from  
Internet>:<port number>" as  
URL in web browser  
Bandwidth control (bitrate)  
Select the amount of data to be distributed.  
Setting value:  
vvv.xxx.yyy.zzz:50000  
vvv.xxx.yyy.zzz:50001  
Address exchange via port forwarding  
vvv.xxx.yyy.zzz:50000  
Unlimited / 64kbps / 128kbps / 256kbps / 384kbps / 512kbps /  
768kbps / 1024kbps / 2048kbps / 4096kbps / 8192kbps  
Factory settings: Unlimited  
→192.168.0.254:50000  
Private address  
192.168.0.2  
Internet  
(WAN)  
<NOTE>  
Port number: 50000  
• Set “Audio Mode” to “Off” when selecting “64kbps”. (→page @@)  
• When “Bandwidth control (bitrate)” is set to a low value, the  
SnapShot button may not work depending on the use environment.  
In such a case, select “JPEG” with the Compression button in the  
Live screen and execute SnapShot when distributing images in the  
smallest resolution.  
Cable  
modem /  
XDSL  
Address exchange via port forwarding  
vvv.xxx.yyy.zzz:50001  
modem  
→192.168.0.254:50001  
Private address  
192.168.0.1  
Port number: 50001  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Web screen configurations (continued)  
Recommended network setting for internet  
Perform the recommended settings to connect the camera to the  
Internet.  
Advanced network setting screen  
Click the “Advanced” tab in the network setting screen (→page@@,  
page @@)  
Clicking the “Set” button displays a dialog box telling the user that  
item settings will be changed. After confirming this, click the “OK”  
button.  
Settings relating to the NTP, UPnP, HTTPS, SNMP, and Diffserv  
functions are performed here.  
Click the links to each item to move to the respective setting page.  
• Camera image’s “JPEG/H.264” tab  
JPEG(1)  
Image capture size: 640×360  
JPEG(2)  
zNTP  
Settings relating to the NTP server address and port No. are  
performed here.  
Image capture size: 320×180  
JPEG(3)  
Image capture size: 160×90  
H.264(1) • H.264(2) • H.264(3) • H.264(4)  
Internet mode (over HTTP): On  
Transmission priority: Best effort  
H.264(1)  
Image capture size: 1280×720  
Max bit rate (per client): Max1024 kbps, Min256 kbps  
H.264(2)  
Image capture size: 640×360  
Max bit rate (per client): Max1024 kbps, Min128 kbps  
H.264(3)  
Image capture size: 320×180  
Max bit rate (per client): Max1024 kbps, Min128 kbps  
H.264(4)  
Image capture size: 160×90  
Max bit rate (per client): Max1024 kbps, Min128 kbps  
• “Network” tab in the Network setting screen  
Common IPv6/v4  
Max RTP packet size: Limited (1280 byte)  
HTTP max segment size(MSS): Limited (1280 byte)  
NTP server address setting  
Select the method to acquire the NTP server address.  
Setting value:  
Auto  
Acquires the NTP server address from the DHCP server.  
Sets the address by inputting the NTP server address in  
"NTP server address".  
Manual  
Factory settings: Manual  
<NOTE>  
• To acquire the NTP server address from the DHCP server,  
“Network Settings” (→page @@) must be set to either “DHCP”,  
“Auto(AutoIP)” or “Auto(Advanced)” in the “Network” tab of the  
network setting screen.  
NTP server address  
When “Manual” is selected in the “NTP server address setting”, input  
the IP address or host name of the NTP server.  
Maximum number  
1 to 128 half-size characters  
of characters  
Characters that  
Half-size alphanumeric characters, half-size symbols  
can be entered  
Factory settings: blank  
<NOTE>  
• To input the “NTP server address” host name, the DNS setting must  
be selected on the Network screen of the Network settings. (→page  
@@)  
NTP port [1 to 65535]  
Input the port No. of the NTP server.  
Port Nos. that can be selected  
1 to 65535  
The following port numbers are used by the unit so they cannot be  
used.  
20, 21, 23, 25, 42, 53, 67, 68, 69, 80, 110, 161, 162, 443, 995, 10669,  
10670  
Factory settings: 123  
92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Web screen configurations (continued)  
Time adjustment interval  
Camera short cut  
Selects the interval (1 to 24 hours in 1-hour increments) for acquiring  
the time from the NTP server.  
Setting range: 1h to 24h  
Factory settings: 1h  
Whether to create a camera short cut in the “Network” folder of your  
personal computer is set by selecting “On” or “Off”.  
Select “On” to create a camera short cut.  
To use the camera short cut function, enable the UPnP function in  
advance in your personal computer.  
Setting value:  
Time zone  
Selects the time zone according to the region where the camera is  
being used.  
Creates a camera short cut in the "Network" folder of your  
personal computer.  
On  
Factory settings:  
(GMT)Greenwich Mean Time: Dubin,Edinburgh, Lisbon, London  
No camera short cut is created in the "Network" folder of  
your personal computer.  
Off  
Factory settings: Off  
<NOTE>  
Summer time(daylight saving) [In, Out, Auto]  
Sets whether to use summer time.  
• To display a camera short cut in the Windows “Network” folder, the  
Windows component must be added. Refer to the information below  
to enable UPnP.  
Selects the time zone that corresponds with the region in which the  
unit is going to be used.  
Setting value:  
Windows 7  
Sets the time to summer time. " " is shown in the clock  
display.  
*
“Start”→”Control Panel”→”Network and Internet”→”Network and  
Sharing Center”→”Change Advanced Sharing Settings”→select  
“Enable Network Discovery” in “Network Discovery”→click “Save  
Changes”→Complete  
In  
Out  
Cancels summer time.  
Switches to summer time according to the start/end time  
and date settings (time, day, week, month).  
Auto  
Windows 8  
“Start”→Select “All Applications”→”Control Panel”→”Network and  
Internet”→”Network and Sharing Center”→”Change Advanced  
Sharing Settings”→select “Enable Network Discovery” in “Network  
Discovery”→click “Save Changes”→Complete  
Factory settings: Out  
Start time & date  
End time & date  
Sets the summer time end time and date by time, day, week and  
month when “Auto” is selected in the “Summer time(daylight saving)”  
setting.  
z HTTPS  
Using the HTTPS function enables access to the camera to be  
encrypted and communication safety to be improved.  
See page @@ for more details on the HTTPS setup method.  
z UPnP  
This unit supports UPnP (Universal Plug and Play). Using the UPnP  
function allows the following to be set automatically.  
• Sets the router’s port forwarding function. (However, a UPnP-  
compatible router is necessary).  
This setting is useful when accessing the camera from the Internet,  
a mobile phone or portable terminal.  
• It is set so that a short cut to the camera is created in the “Network”  
folder of your personal computer and that short cut is automatically  
renewed even when the camera’s IP address is changed.  
CRT key generate  
Auto port forwarding  
Whether to use the router’s port forwarding function is set by selecting  
“On” or “Off”.  
To use the automatic port forwarding function, the used router must  
support UPnP and the UPnP function must be enabled.  
Setting value:  
A CRT key (SSL encryption key) is generated by HTTPS.  
To generate a CRT key, click the “Execute” button to display the “CRT  
Key Generate Dialog”.  
For more details, refer to “Generating a CRT key (SSL encryption  
key)” (→page@@)  
Self-signed Certificate - Generate  
A self-signed security certificate is generated by HTTPS. (Self-signed  
Certificate)  
On  
Off  
Uses the router's port forwarding function.  
The router's port forwarding function is not used.  
To generate a self-signed certificate (security certificate), click the  
“Execute” button to display the “Self-signed Certificate Generate”  
dialog and perform the operation.  
For more details, refer to “Generating a Self-signed Certificate  
(Security Certificate)” (→page@@).  
Factory settings: Off  
<NOTE>  
• The port number may be changed by automatic port forwarding. If  
the number is changed, the port No. of the camera registered to the  
personal computer or recorder must be changed.  
• The UPnP function may be used when the camera is connected to  
the IPv4 network. IPv6 is not supported.  
• To confirm that automatic port forwarding is correctly set, click the  
“Status” tab in the Maintenance screen to confirm that the “UPnP”  
status is set to “Enable”. (→page@@)  
If “Enable”is not displayed, refer to “Cannot access the Internet from  
the Camera” in the “What’s the Trouble?” section. (→page @@)  
Self-signed Certificate - Information  
This displays information relating to the self-signed certificate  
(security certificate).  
When the “Confirm” button is clicked, the registered content of the  
generated self-signed certificate (security certificate) is displayed in  
the “Self-signed Certificate - Confirm” dialog.  
Click the “Delete” button to delete the generated self-signed certificate  
(security certificate).  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Web screen configurations (continued)  
CA Certificate - Generate Certificate Signing Request  
When using a security certificate issued by the Certificate Authority  
(CA) as a security certificate for HTTPS, a Certificate Signing Request  
(CSR) is generated for application to the Certificate Authority (CA).  
To generate a Certificate Signing Request (CSR), click the “Execute”  
button to display the “Certificate Signing Request (CSR) Generate”  
dialog and perform the operation.  
HTTPS port[1 to 65535]  
This sets the Port No. to be used with HTTPS.  
Port Nos. that can be selected  
The following port numbers are used by the unit so they cannot be  
used.  
1 to 65535  
20, 21, 23, 25, 42, 53, 67, 68, 69, 80, 110, 123, 161, 162, 554, 995,  
10669, 10670, 59000 to 61000  
For more details, refer to “Generating a Certificate Signing Request  
(CSR)” (→ page@@)  
Factory settings: 443  
<NOTE>  
• This unit will restart if the connection method is changed.  
• When using a self-signed certificate:  
A warning screen is displayed when accessing the camera by  
HTTPS for the first time. Install the self-signed certificate (security  
certificate) in your personal computer in accordance with the screen  
instructions. (→page @@)  
• When using a server certificate:  
Install the Certificate Authority (CA) root certificate or intermediate  
certificate in your browser in advance.  
Follow the Certificate Authority (CA) procedures to acquire and  
install root certificates and intermediate certificates.  
• When accessing the camera by HTTPS, the image display speed  
and frame rate of the moving image may reduce.  
• When accessing the camera by HTTPS, it may take some time for  
the images to be displayed.  
• When accessing the camera by HTTPS, images may be disturbed  
and sound may be interrupted.  
• The maximum number of cameras that can be connected  
simultaneously depends on the maximum image size and  
distribution format.  
CA Certificate - CA Certificate install  
This displays information relating to server certificates (security  
certificates) issued by the Certificate Authority (CA), which are to be  
or are already installed .  
In the “File Open” dialog, which is displayed by clicking the “Browse”  
button, select the file of the server certificate (security certificate)  
issued by the Certificate Authority (CA) and click the “Execute” button  
to install the server certificate (security certificate).  
If the server certificate (security certificate) is installed, its file name  
will be displayed.  
For more details, refer to “Installing the Server Certificate”  
(→page@@).  
CA Certificate - Information  
This displays information relating to the server certificate (security  
certificate).  
When the “Confirm” button is clicked, the registered content of the  
installed server certificate (security certificate) is displayed in the  
“Server Certificate - Confirm” dialog”, If the server certificate (security  
certificate) is not installed, the content of the generated Certificate  
Signing Request (CSR) is displayed.  
z SNMP  
Click the “Delete” button to delete the installed server certificate  
(security certificate).  
This performs settings relating to the SNMP function. The status of  
the unit can be confirmed by connecting to it with SNMP manager. To  
use the SNMP function, consult your network administrator.  
<NOTE>  
• To delete an enabled server certificate (security certificate),  
confirm that there is a backup to the said certificate in your  
personal computer or recording media. A server certificate (security  
certificate) will be needed to reinstall it.  
Connection [HTTP, HTTPS]  
This sets the method to connect to the unit.  
Setting value:  
HTTP  
Only HTTP connection is possible.  
Only HTTPS connection is possible.  
HTTPS  
Factory settings: HTTP  
For more details, refer to “Setting the Connection Method”  
(→page@@).  
Community  
Input the name of the community to be monitored.  
Maximum number  
0 to 32 half-size characters  
of characters  
Invalid characters  
Full size characters  
Factory settings: blank  
<NOTE>  
• Be sure to enter the community name when using the SNMP  
function. The SNMP function cannot be used if the community name  
field is left blank.  
System name  
Input the name of the system to control the unit with the SNMP  
function.  
Maximum number  
0 to 32 half-size characters  
of characters  
Invalid characters  
Full size characters  
Factory settings: blank  
Location  
Input the location where the unit has been installed.  
Maximum number  
0 to 32 half-size characters  
of characters  
Factory settings: blank  
94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Web screen configurations (continued)  
Contact  
Input the email address or telephone number of the administrator.  
Maximum number  
0 to 255 half-size characters  
of characters  
Invalid characters  
Full size characters  
Factory settings: blank  
zDiffserv  
This performs settings relating to the Diffserv function. The Diffserv  
function sets the priority of image/audio data transmitted from the  
router.  
Priorities set to this unit must be aligned with DSCP values set to the  
router.  
To use the Diffserv function, consult your network administrator.  
DSCP(0-63)  
Input the packet priority.  
Maximum number  
0 to 63 half-size characters  
of characters  
Factory settings: 0  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Web screen configurations (continued)  
Setting HTTPS  
This encrypts access to the camera and sets HTTPS to improve communication safety.  
Setting HTTPS is performed by following the procedures below.  
1
2
3
4
5
1. Generating a CRT key  
(SSL encryption key) (→ page @@)  
When using self-signed certificates  
When using server certificates  
2. Generating a self-signed certificate  
3. Generating a Certificate Signing  
(→ page @@)  
Request (→ page @@)  
Request to Certificate Authority (CA)  
- Generate Server Certificate  
4. Installing a Server Certificate  
(→ page @@)  
5. Setting the Connection Method  
(→ page @@)  
Accessing the Camera by HTTPS  
<NOTE>  
• When using a server certificate, the process from applying to the Certificate Authority (CA) to issuing a server certificate must be performed between  
customers and the Certificate Authority (CA).  
• Use either a self-signed certificate or server certificate. When simultaneously generating a self-signed certificate and installing a server certificate, this  
unit will prioritize the server certificate.  
96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Web screen configurations (continued)  
Generating a CRT key (SSL encryption key)  
(CRT key generate)  
Generating a self-signed certificate  
(Self-signed Certificate - Generate)  
<NOTE>  
<NOTE>  
• A CRT key cannot be generated when self-signed certificates and  
server certificates are enabled.  
• A self-signed certificate cannot be generated when a CRT key has not  
been generated.  
• The size of the key that can be used by the Certificate Authority (CA)  
differs when using a server certificate. Confirm in advance the the size  
of the key that can be used.  
• Generating a CRT key takes about 1 minute for 1024 bit and about  
2 minutes for 2048 bit. Do not operate the browser until CRT key  
generation is complete. Image display and communication speed may  
reduce while generating a CRT key.  
1. Click the “Execute” button in “Self-signed Certificate -  
Generate”.  
“Self-signed Certificate - Generate” is displayed.  
1. Click the “Execute” button in “CRT key generate”.  
The “CRT key generate” dialog is displayed.  
2. Input information relating to the certificate to be  
generated.  
Items to be entered are as follows.  
2. The size of the generated CRT key is selected from  
1024bit/2048bit in “CRT key generate – RSA key size”.  
<NOTE>  
• When using a server certificate, the RSA key size must be in  
accordance with the demands of the Certificate Authority (CA) which  
will be applied to.  
Maximum number  
of characters  
Item  
Description  
Inputs the camera address  
or host name.  
64 half-size  
characters  
Common Name  
2 half-size  
characters: country  
code  
Inputs the country code.  
(can be abbreviated)  
Country  
(e.g. Japan: JP)  
3. Click the “Execute” button.  
CRT key generation starts.  
Inputs the name of the state. 128 half-size  
State  
When CRT key generation stops, the size of the CRT key generated  
by the “Current CRT key” and the date and time generation concluded  
will be displayed.  
(can be abbreviated)  
characters  
Inputs the name of the city.  
(can be abbreviated)  
128 half-size  
characters  
Locality  
<NOTE>  
Inputs the name of the  
organization.  
(can be abbreviated)  
64 half-size  
characters  
• Perform procedures 1 to 3 to change (update) the generated CRT  
key. Because the CRT key, self-signed certificate and server  
certificate are enabled as a set, it will be necessary to once again  
generate a self-signed certificate or apply for a server certificate  
when the CRT key is changed.  
Organization  
Inputs the name of the  
Organizational Unit organizational unit.  
(can be abbreviated)  
64 half-size  
characters  
• When the CRT key is changed, ?previous CRT keys are historically  
managed one at a time?.  
Displays the size of the  
current CRT key and the  
date and time generation  
was completed.  
Common Name  
Translator comment  
*
I did not really understand the Japanese here, so my translation is  
probably over-direct. Clicking the “Apply” button in the “Current CRT  
key” of the “CRT key generate” dialog displays the “Previous CRT  
key” dialog, allowing confirmation of the key size and the date and  
time generation was completed.  
<NOTE>  
• Characters that can be input for “Common Name”, “Country”,  
“State”, “Locality”, “Organization”, “Organizational Unit” are 0 to 9  
(half-size characters), A to Z (half-size characters), a to z (half-size  
characters), and the following half-size symbols: -. _ , + / ( ).  
• When connecting the camera to the Internet, set the address or  
host name to be accessed from the Internet in “Common Name”. In  
this case, when accessing the camera locally, a security warning  
screen is displayed every time the camera is accessed even when a  
security certificate is installed.  
Clicking the “Apply” button in “Previous CRT key” allows the  
previous CRT key to be switched to the current CRT key.  
• When inputting the IPv6 address in “Common Name”, surround the  
address with [ ].  
e.g. [2001:db8::10]  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Web screen configurations (continued)  
3. Click the [OK] button after inputting the address.  
A self-signed certificate is generated.  
<NOTE>  
2. Input information relating to the certificate to be  
generated  
Items to be entered are as follows.  
• Information relating to the generated self-signed certificate is  
displayed in “Self-signed Certificate - Information”. The following  
is displayed depending on the status of the self-signed security  
certificate.  
Maximum number  
of characters  
Item  
Description  
Inputs the camera address  
or host name.  
64 half-size  
characters  
Common Name  
Displayed content  
Description  
2 half-size  
When the self-signed certificate is not  
generated  
Country  
Inputs the country code.  
characters: country  
code  
Not generated  
When the self-signed certificate is already  
generated and the server certificate is  
already installed  
• The server certificate is enabled in this  
case.  
128 half-size  
characters  
State  
Inputs the name of the state.  
Inputs the name of the city.  
Invalid  
(Reason: CA Certificate  
installed)  
128 half-size  
characters  
Locality  
Inputs the name of the  
organization.  
64 half-size  
characters  
Organization  
Organizational Unit  
Common name of the  
self-signed certificate  
When the self-signed certificate is already  
generated and enabled  
Inputs the name of the  
organizational unit.  
64 half-size  
characters  
• When the “Confirm” button is clicked, the registered content of the  
generated self-signed certificate (security certificate) is displayed in  
the “Self-signed Certificate Confirm” dialog.  
Displays the size of the  
current CRT key and the  
date and time generation  
was completed.  
Common Name  
<NOTE>  
• When using a server certificate, the information to be input must be  
in accordance with the demands of the Certificate Authority (CA),  
which will be applied to.  
• Characters that can be input for “Common Name”, “Country”,  
“State”, “Locality”, “Organization”, “Organizational Unit” are 0 to 9  
(half-size characters), A to Z (half-size characters), a to z (half-size  
characters), and the following half-size symbols: -. _ , + / ( ).  
• Click the “Delete” button to delete the generated self-signed  
certificate (security certificate).  
• When “HTTPS” is selected in “Connection”, the self-signed  
certificate (security certificate) cannot be deleted.  
3. Click the [OK] button after inputting the address.  
The “Save As” dialog is displayed.  
4. In the “Save As” dialog, assign a file name to the  
Certificate Signing Request (CSR) and save it in personal  
computer  
Apply to the Certificate Authority (CA) using the saved Certificate  
Signing Request (CSR).  
Generating a Certificate Signing Request (CSR)  
(CA Certificate - Generate Certificate Signing  
Request)  
<NOTE>  
<NOTE>  
• A certificate signing request (CSR) cannot be generated if a CRT key  
has not been generated.  
• A server certificate is issued for both the generated Certificate  
Signing Request (CSR) and CRT key. The issued server certificate  
can no longer be used when generating/updating the CRT key after  
applying to the Certificate Authority (CA).  
• The Certificate Signing Request (CSR) generated by this unit is in a  
PEM format.  
• To generate a certificate signing request (CSR). perform the following  
settings in advance in the web browser Internet options. Perform the  
following settings in the “Security” tab (accessed from “Tools” in the  
menu bar - “Internet Options” -”Security”).  
• Register the camera as a “Trusted Site”  
• In “Level Customize”,.go to “File Download” from “Download” and set  
to “Enable”.  
• In “Level Customize”, go to “Automatically Display Dialog when  
Downloading File” from “Download” and set to “Enable”.  
1. Click the “Execute” button in “CA Certificate - Generate  
Certificate Signing Request”.  
The “CA Certificate - Generate Certificate Signing Request” dialog is  
displayed.  
98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Web screen configurations (continued)  
Installing a Server Certificate  
Setting the Connection Method (Connection)  
(CA Certificate - CA Certificate install)  
1. Set the method to access the camera in “Connection”  
HTTP: Only HTTP connection is possible.  
HTTPS: Only HTTPS connection is possible.  
<NOTE>  
• A server certificate (security certificate) cannot be installed if a  
Certificate Signing Request (CSR) has not been generated.  
• The server certificate must have been issued by the Certificate  
Authority (CA) in order to install it.  
2. Set the Port No. to be used with HTTPS in “HTTPS Port”  
Port Nos. that can be selected 1 to 65535  
The following port numbers are used by the unit so they cannot be  
used.  
20, 21, 23, 25, 42, 53, 67, 68, 69, 80, 110, 123, 161, 162, 554, 995,  
10669, 10670, 59000 to 61000  
1. Click the “Browse” button in “CA Certificate - CA  
Certificate install”  
The “Open File” dialog is displayed.  
Factory settings: 443  
2. Select the server certificate file and click “Open”. Then  
click the “Execute” button.  
The server certificate is installed.  
<NOTE>  
• The name of the host registered to the installed server certificate  
is displayed in “CA Certificate - Information”. The following is also  
displayed depending on the status of the server certificate.  
3. Click the “Set” button.  
The camera restarts and access to the camera via HTTPS is enabled.  
(→page@@, page @@)  
<NOTE>  
• This unit will restart if the connection method is changed.  
Using a self-signed certificate  
A warning screen is displayed when accessing the camera by  
HTTPS for the first time. Install the self-signed certificate (security  
certificate) in your personal computer in accordance with the screen  
instructions. (→ page 165)  
Displayed content  
Invalid  
Description  
When the server certificate is not installed  
Common name of the  
server certificate  
When the server certificate is already  
installed and enabled.  
Using a server certificate  
When the effective period of the server  
certificate has expired  
Expired  
Install the Certificate Authority (CA) root certificate or intermediate  
certificate in your browser in advance. Follow the Certificate  
Authority (CA) procedures to acquire and install root certificates and  
intermediate certificates.  
• When accessing the camera by HTTPS, the image display speed  
and frame rate of the moving image may reduce.  
• When accessing the camera by HTTPS, it may take some time for  
the images to be displayed.  
• When the “Confirm” button is clicked, the content of the installed  
server certificate (security certificate) is displayed in the “CA  
Certificate - Confirm” dialog. (An asterisk is displayed in the  
Organizational Unit Name field only.)  
• When accessing the camera by HTTPS, images may be disturbed  
and sound may be interrupted.  
• The maximum number of cameras that can be connected  
simultaneously depends on the maximum image size and  
distribution format.  
Accessing the Camera by HTTPS  
1. Launch the web browser in your personal computer.  
• Click the “Delete” button to delete the installed server certificate  
(security certificate).  
• When “HTTPS” is selected in “Connection Method”, the server  
certificate (security certificate) cannot be deleted.  
2. Input the camera’s IP address in the address bar of the  
web browser.  
Input address: https://192.168.0.10/  
<NOTE>  
• When the HTTPS port No. is changed from “443”, input “https://  
camera IP address: Port No.” in the address bar.  
E.g. https://192.168.0.11:61443  
• When this unit is in a local network, set a proxy server from the  
web browser (menu bar: “Tools”-”Internet Options”) to ensure that a  
proxy server is not used for a local address.  
• Perform STEP 1 to STEP 2 to update a server certificate.  
• To delete an enabled server certificate (security certificate),  
confirm that there is a backup to the said certificate in your  
personal computer or recording media. A server certificate (security  
certificate) will be needed to reinstall it.  
• The HTTPS function can no longer be used when the effective  
period of the server certificate has expired. In such a case, the  
connection method is changed to HTTP when the unit is restarted.  
Update the server certificate before its effective period expires.  
• The effective period of the server certificate can be confirmed by  
double-clicking the server certificate file issued by the Certificate  
Authority (CA).  
3. Press the “Enter” key.  
The Live screen page is displayed.  
The security certificate is installed when the security warning screen  
is displayed. (→page @@)  
When “User Authentication” is set to “On”, the user name and  
password input screen is displayed before the Live screen page  
appears.  
<NOTE>  
• When HTTPS is used, screen and image display may slow down  
and image update interval (frame rate) may also slow down.  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Web screen configurations (continued)  
z Install the security certificate  
4. Click “Certificate Install (I)...”  
When using HTTPS to access the camera, the security warning  
screen will be displayed if the security certificate of the said camera  
has not been installed in your personal computer. To prevent this  
warning screen being displayed, the security certificate must be  
installed in accordance with the following procedures. If it is not  
installed, the security warning screen will be displayed every time the  
camera is accessed.  
(screen, SFV631L screen at bottom of page 167)  
<NOTE>  
• The security certificate will be installed to your personal computer  
based on the content set for “Common Name”. The content set for  
the “Host Name” must therefore match that set for the address/  
host name used to access the camera. If the content differs, a  
security warning screen will be displayed every time the camera is  
accessed.  
<NOTE>  
• A security warning screen will be displayed if the camera address/  
host name is changed even when a security certificate has been  
installed. Reinstall the security certificate.  
• When connecting the camera to the Internet, set the address or  
host name to be accessed from the Internet in “Common Name”. In  
this case, when accessing the camera locally, a security warning  
screen is displayed every time the camera is accessed even when a  
security certificate is installed.  
• If “Certificate Install (I)...” is not displayed. close Internet Explorer  
and restart it by selecting “Run as Administrator”.  
“Start” - “Program” -right-click on “Internet Explorer” and click  
“Execute as Administrator (A)..”.  
• In the case of Windows 8 and 8.1, right-click on “iexplore” under “C:\  
Program Files\Internet Explorer” and click “Execute as Administrator  
(A)..”.  
• When the security certificate is correctly installed, an icon of the key  
will be displayed in the address bar of the browser accessing the  
camera. (in the case of Internet Explorer 8.0 and 9.0)  
• The screen will differ partially in the case of Internet Explorer 10 and  
11.  
5. Click “Next”, which is displayed in the certificate import  
wizard.  
(screen, SFV631L screen at top of page 168)  
1. Accessing the Camera by HTTPS  
2. When the security warning screen is displayed, click  
“Continue to this website (not recommended)”.  
(screen, SFV631L screen on page 166)  
<NOTE>  
• In the case of Internet Explorer 10 and 11, select the “Save  
destination” and click “Next”.  
6. Select “Place all certificates in the next store (P)” and  
click “Refer ®..”.  
The Live screen page is displayed.  
When the authentication screen is displayed, input the user name and  
password.  
(screen, SFV631L screen at bottom of page 168)  
<NOTE>  
• When the above screen is displayed after accessing a device apart  
from the camera or a website, there may be a security problem, so  
check this carefully.  
3. Click “Certificate error” in the URL and then click  
“Certificate display”.  
(screen, SFV631L screen at top of page 167)  
7. Select “Trusted Route Certificate Authority” and click  
“OK”.  
(screen, SFV631L screen at top of page 169)  
100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Web screen configurations (continued)  
8. Click “Next”  
Maintenance screen  
Among the various maintenance operations performed on this screen  
are system log checks, system version upgrading and initialization of the  
unit.  
(screen, SFV631L screen at bottom of page 169)  
The Maintenance screen consists of four tabs: “System log”, “Product  
info.”, “Status”, “Default reset” and “Back up”.  
System log screen  
A maximum of a hundred system logs can be stored in the unit’s internal  
memory.  
9. Click “Complete”.  
When this maximum number has been exceeded, the old logs are  
overwritten successively by the new logs.  
(screen, SFV631L screen at top of page 170)  
The logs are cleared when the unit’s power is turned off.  
10.Click “Yes”.  
No  
The running numbers of the system logs are displayed here.  
(screen, SFV631L screen at bottom of page 170)  
Time & date  
The times and dates when the logs were generated are displayed  
here.  
The 24-hour system is used to display this information.  
Error description  
Details of the error logs are displayed here.  
For further details on the system logs, refer to page @@.  
When importing is finished, the “Certificate was imported correctly”  
screen is displayed.  
Product info. screen  
11.Click “OK”.  
The versions of the unit’s software can be checked on this screen.  
The “Model no.”, “MAC address”, “Serial no.”, “Firmware version” and  
other information about the unit is displayed.  
(screen, SFV631L screen on page 171)  
Closing the browser after importing the certificate and reconnecting to  
it will stop the “Certificate error” screen being displayed.  
Model no.  
Display the unit’s model number.  
MAC address  
Display the unit’s MAC address.  
Serial no.  
Display the unit’s serial number.  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Web screen configurations (continued)  
<NOTE>  
Firmware version  
• After the [Execute] button has been pressed, it will take about one  
minute with the Camera Main software or about 3 minutes with the  
Network software for the progress bar that indicates the progress  
made in the version upgrading to appear.  
CPU Software - Interface  
Display the software version of the interface.  
• Use the personal computer on the same subnet as the camera to  
upgrade the software version.  
CPU Software - Camera Main  
Display the software version of the camera unit.  
• Before using the version upgrading software, be absolutely sure to  
check the precautions to be observed with your dealer, and follow the  
dealer’s instructions.  
CPU Software - Servo  
Display the software version of the servo.  
• Use the following files specified by Panasonic Corporation as the  
software used for version upgrading.  
CPU Software - Network  
Display the software version of the network.  
CPU Software Interface  
.sif files  
CPU Software Camera  
Main  
.scm files  
EEPROM - Interface  
Display the version of the setup data for the interface.  
CPU Software Servo  
CPU Software Network  
EEPROM Interface  
FPGA Lens  
.spt files  
.snw files  
.eep files  
.fav files  
.fco files  
.fls files  
FPGA - Lens  
Display the FPGA version of the lens.  
FPGA - AVIO  
Display the FPGA version of the AVIO.  
FPGA AVIO  
FPGA Com  
FPGA - Com  
Display the FPGA version of the communication.  
• Do not turn off the unit’s power while upgrading a software version.  
(Do not turn off the power until the progress bar display is cleared.)  
• While a software version is being upgraded, do not attempt to execute  
any other operations until the version has been upgraded.  
Viewer software installation counter  
The number of plug-in viewer software applications which have been  
installed automatically from the unit is displayed by this counter.  
Firmware file  
Update the firmware.  
For details on how to update, see “Updating the firmware” (→ page  
@@).  
Status  
Display the current status of the unit.  
zUpdating the firmware  
Perform the following to update the firmware.  
1. After consulting with your dealer, download the latest  
software to the hard disk of your personal computer.  
<NOTE>  
• No spaces or full-size characters can be used for the directory in  
which the software will be stored.  
• Keep the maximum combined number of characters to be used for  
the name of the directory in which the software will be stored and for  
the name of the software which has been downloaded to less than  
250 characters.  
2. Click the Browse button, and specify the downloaded  
software.  
3. Click the “Execute” button.  
The software upgrade check screen is displayed.  
After upgrading the software version, be absolutely sure to delete the  
temporary Internet files.  
<NOTE>  
• Be absolutely sure to upgrade the software versions from the  
personal computer in the same network (LAN) as the unit whose  
firmware version is to be updated.  
102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Web screen configurations (continued)  
Status confirmation screen  
Default reset screen  
Confirm the status of the unit.  
The unit’s setting data is initialized and the unit is restarted on this  
screen.  
Reset to the default (Except thenetwork settings)  
When the Execute button is clicked, the unit’s settings are returned to  
their defaults.  
The login user name and password will also return to their defaults  
(admin/12345).  
zUPnP  
When the initialization operation is started, no operations can be  
undertaken for about 2 minutes.  
<NOTE>  
Port number (HTTP)  
Displays the port number configured via UPnP port forwarding.  
• The following setting items will not be returned to defaults.  
- Format  
- Frequency  
Status  
Displays the port forwarding status.  
- DHCP  
- IP address  
- Subnet mask  
Port number (HTTPS)  
Displays the port number configured via UPnP port forwarding.  
- Default gateway  
- DNS  
- HTTP port number  
Status  
Displays the port forwarding status.  
- Line speed  
- Bandwidth control (bit rate)  
Router global address  
Displays the global address of the router.  
• [AWB] and [ABB] adjustment values will not be returned to defaults.  
Reboot  
When the Execute button is clicked, the unit is rebooted.  
After the unit has been rebooted, no operations can be undertaken for  
2 minutes as is the case when the unit’s power is turned on.  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Web screen configurations (continued)  
Back up screen  
On this screen, the unit’s settings can be saved to a personal computer  
or settings saved in a personal computer can be loaded into the unit for  
use.  
Config data type  
Specify the type of settings to save when saving the unit’s  
configuration data on the computer.  
Setting value:  
Camera  
Network  
Camera settings  
Network settings  
Download  
Save the unit’s settings onto the computer.  
When the destination dialog box appears after clicking the Execute  
button, specify the destination folder.  
When [Camera] is selected in [Config data type], the following settings  
are saved.  
- Scene Scene1 settings  
- Scene Scene2 settings  
- Scene Scene3 settings  
- Scene Scene4 settings  
- System settings  
- Preset settings  
<NOTE>  
• It takes 10 seconds for the the destination dialog box to appear after  
clicking the Execute button.  
Upload  
The unit’s setting files, which were saved in the personal computer by  
the download function, are uploaded.  
Click the Browse button to display the dialog box, and specify the  
saved file.  
When you click the OK button in the message dialog box that appears  
after you click the Execute button, uploading starts.  
Another message dialog box appears after about 2 minutes. When  
you click the OK button, the unit will restart automatically.  
<NOTE>  
• Use the files downloaded by the unit as the data to be used for  
uploading.  
Do not change the extension of the files which have been  
downloaded.  
• Do not turn off the unit’s power while downloading or uploading is  
underway.  
• Do not attempt to perform any operations while downloading or  
uploading is underway. Instead, wait until the downloading or  
uploading is completed.  
104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Displaying the web screen using a mobile terminal  
Connect the mobile terminal to the unit, and display the unit’s images  
(MJPEG format only). Refreshing to the latest images takes place  
automatically.  
Pan/Tilt  
Operations such as panning, tilting and zooming can also be performed  
from the mobile terminal.  
The following models are supported as mobile terminals. (as of August  
2014).  
Mobile terminal  
Specifications  
iPad  
iPhone  
iPod touch  
iOS 7.1  
Android 4.3  
Android™ terminals  
<NOTE>  
• For the latest information on compatible operating systems and web  
browsers, visit the support desk at the following website.  
http://pro-av.panasonic.net/  
• Use a standard browser with an Android terminal.  
• Images are displayed only in the JPEG format when using the  
standard browser of an Android terminal.  
• When the authentication dialog box is displayed, input the user name  
and password.  
The default settings for the user name and password are as follows.  
User name  
Password  
admin  
12345  
When this button is pressed, the buttons for performing the pan/tilt  
operations are displayed on the screen.  
In order to ensure security, the password for the user name of “admin”  
must be changed without fail. (→page @@)  
• The buttons listed below are not displayed when “On” has been  
selected as the “User auth.” (page 84) setting and “3. Live only” has  
The camera is panned toward the left.  
The camera is tilted upward.  
been selected as the access level setting.  
-Pan/Tilt  
The camera is tilted downward.  
The camera is panned toward the right.  
-Zoom  
-Preset  
-Iris  
-Focus  
-Camera menu (OSD menu) operation  
• If the mobile terminal does not support the character code UTF-8, the  
characters cannot be displayed properly.  
• Only one Android terminal can be connected to the unit.  
<NOTE>  
• The camera will not move diagonally even when the pan button and  
tilt buttons are pressed at the same time. (The button pressed first  
takes precedence.)  
1. Input “http://IP address/mobile/ ” 1 using the mobile  
terminal, and press the enter button.  
*
Zoom  
The unit’s zooming operations are performed using these buttons.  
The unit’s images will now be displayed.  
1
This IP address is the global IP address for the WAN of the router  
*
Use this to adjust the zoom (magnification) in the Wide  
direction.  
that enables internet access. However, it is the local IP address  
if the unit in the same LAN is to be accessed using a mobile  
terminal which supports a wireless connection.  
Use this to adjust the zoom (magnification) to 1.0x.  
Use this to adjust the zoom (magnification) in the Tele  
direction.  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Displaying the web screen using a mobile terminal (continued)  
Preset  
Resolution switching  
When this button is pressed, the buttons for selecting the preset  
positions are displayed on the screen.  
When this button is pressed, the buttons for selecting the resolution  
are displayed on the screen.  
The characters are displayed in green for the resolution button which  
is currently selected.  
The resolution configured with [JPEG(1)], [JPEG(2)], and [JPEG(3)] in  
the [Video over IP] tab is displayed.  
When one of the displayed buttons is pressed, the camera’s  
pan/tilt position moves to the preset position that was  
registered ahead of time.  
The settings that are reproduced at this position are the  
settings which were established on the [Preset Scope] menu  
(→ page @@, page @@, page @@).  
The images are displayed with a resolution of 1920 x 1080  
<<icon>>  
pixels.  
The images are displayed with a resolution of 1280 x 720  
<<icon>>  
pixels.  
The images are displayed with a resolution of 640 x 360  
pixels.  
The images are displayed with a resolution of 320 x 180  
pixels.  
The images are displayed with a resolution of 160 x 90  
<<icon>>  
pixels.  
<NOTE>  
• Depending on the resolution set for [JPEG(1)], [JPEG(2)], and  
[JPEG(3)], resolution switching may not be possible.  
• If the HTTP port number has been changed from “80”, enter  
“http://<IP address>:<port number>/mobile” 1 to specify the unit’s  
*
port number.  
• When [HTTPS] - [Connection] (→ page @@) is set to [HTTPS] in  
the [Advanced] tab of the Network screen, enter the following.  
https://<IP address port number>/mobile  
• When the authentication dialog box appears, enter the user name  
and password of an administrator or general user. Depending on  
the mobile terminal model, password entry may be required when  
transitioning between each screen.  
• Audio cannot be received on mobile terminals.  
• Depending on the mobile terminal model, image display may not be  
possible if the image is too large. In such cases, reducing [Image  
quality] for [JPEG] (→ page @@) may enable display.  
• Access may not be possible depending on your mobile terminal and  
device plans.  
106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Displaying the web screen using a mobile terminal (continued)  
Iris  
Focus  
When this button is pressed, the buttons for performing the iris  
operations are displayed on the screen.  
When this button is pressed, the buttons for performing the focusing  
operations are displayed on the screen.  
Use this to switch between auto and manual focusing. At  
This switches the iris between auto and manual. At the auto  
setting, the button label is green.  
the auto setting, focusing is performed (the focal point is  
adjusted) automatically.  
At the auto setting, the button label turns green.  
This adjusts the iris in the “close” direction.  
It does not work during automatic adjustments.  
When this is pressed while the focus is being adjusted  
manually, the focus will be temporarily adjusted  
automatically.  
This adjusts the iris in the “open” direction.  
It does not work during automatic adjustments.  
It does not work during automatic adjustments.  
Use this to adjust the focus in the Near direction.  
It does not work during automatic adjustments.  
Use this to adjust the focus in the Far direction.  
It does not work during automatic adjustments.  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Displaying the web screen using a mobile terminal (continued)  
• If, when using an Android terminal, more than one button is pressed  
at the same time, one of the buttons may remain pressed even after  
it has been released. At a time like this, press again only that button  
that has remained pressed to release it.  
Camera menu (OSD menu) operation  
Example) When the pan (left) button and pan (right) button are  
pressed at the same time, either the pan (left) button or  
pan (right) button will remain pressed, and panning will  
continue.  
When the pan (left) button or pan (right) button that has  
remained pressed is pressed again, the panning will stop.  
1
This IP address is the global IP address for the WAN of the router  
that enables internet access.  
*
However, it is the local IP address if the unit in the same LAN is  
to be accessed using a mobile terminal which supports a wireless  
connection.  
When this button is pressed, the buttons for performing the camera  
menu operations are displayed on the screen.  
At the same time, the camera menus are displayed on the unit’s  
images.  
The unit’s camera menu operations can be performed by  
pressing the  
,
,
and  
buttons.  
When any of these buttons is pressed to switch to an  
operation that does not involve a camera menu, the camera  
menus are no longer displayed on the unit’s images.  
For details of the camera menu, refer to page @@.  
Tally lamp lighting status displays  
The lighting status of the camera’s tally lamp is monitored at regular  
intervals while the camera is connected, and the lamp’s display is  
updated.  
While the tally lamp is on, the IP video display area frame turns red.  
When the tally lamp is off, the display area will return to normal.  
<NOTE>  
• It may take 2 seconds or so for a change in the lighting status of the  
tally lamp to be reflected on the display of the mobile terminal.  
• When [Disable] is selected for [Tally Enable] (→page @@, page  
@@), the camera’s tally lamp will not light even when the tally  
signal is input. However, the area frame of the main area (IP video  
display area) will turn red.  
• If the HTTP port number has been changed from “80”, enter  
“http://<IP address>:<port number>/mobile” 1 to specify the unit’s  
*
port number.  
• When the authentication dialog box appears, enter the user name  
and password of an administrator or general user.  
Depending on the mobile terminal, password entry may be required  
when transitioning between each screen.  
• If the [User auth.] (→ page @@) setting has been changed to  
[On] from a personal computer while the mobile terminal screen  
is displayed, it may not be possible to refresh the mobile terminal  
screen. In a case like this, first close the web browser which is  
running on the mobile terminal, and then open the mobile terminal  
screen again.  
• If the images are large, it may not be possible to display them on  
some mobile terminals. In a case like this, it may be possible to  
display the images if a setting close to low image quality is selected  
for “Image quality” (→ page @@) of the “JPEG image settings”  
among the “Video over IP”.  
• Access may not be possible depending on your mobile terminal and  
device plans.  
108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System log displays  
NTP-related error displays  
Category  
Display  
Description of error  
Connection error  
No response from the NTP server.  
• The IP address of the server may be incorrect.  
Check the server’s IP address settings again.  
• The NTP server may be down.  
Consult your server administrator.  
Internal error  
Undefined error.  
• A problem has occurred in the NTP function. Check the NTP settings again.  
• The time has been updated successfully.  
Successful  
NTP update succeeded.  
NTP-based time  
synchronization  
HTTPS-related log displays  
Category  
Display  
Description of error  
HTTPS  
Self-signed Certificate - Generated  
Self-signed Certificate - Deleted  
Certificate Signing Request - Generated  
CA Certificate - Installed  
• Generation of the self-signed certificate is complete.  
• Deletion of the self-signed certificate is complete.  
• Generation of the certificate signing request is complete.  
• Installation of the server certificate is complete.  
• Deletion of the server certificate is complete.  
• The previous CRT key has been applied as the CRT key.  
• Generation of the CRT key is complete.  
CA Certificate - Deleted  
Previous CRT key - Applied  
Previous CRT key - Applied  
Login-related displays  
Category  
Display  
(User name or IP address)  
Description of error  
Login  
• If user authorization has been set, the name of the user who has logged onto  
the unit is displayed.  
• If host authorization has been set, the IP address of the user who has logged  
onto the unit is displayed.  
109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Limiters  
This unit comes with settings (referred to as “limiters”) that restrict the  
panning and tilting movement ranges.  
Depending on the installation location, obstacles that may come into  
contact with the remote camera may exist its movement range.  
In such cases, setting the limiters before the obstacles will prevent  
contact.  
The positions of four limiters — namely, the upper, lower, leftmost and  
right-most limits of the travel range — can be set.  
Once they have been set, the positions will not be lost even after the  
power has been turned off.  
The limiters can be set or released both by the wireless remote control  
and controller or web setting screen.  
Whatever was set or released last takes precedence.  
For the controller operations, refer to the Operating Instructions of the  
controller.  
The settings of the limiters using the wireless remote control will be  
described here.  
110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting/releasing the limiters  
Setting/releasing the limiters  
Releasing the limiters  
The limiter positions that are set can be released by following the steps  
below.  
1. Press the [MENU] button.  
Tap the button (rather than pressing it). When it is pressed for 2  
When the position is released, the tally lamp blinks twice.  
seconds, the camera menu will appear.  
If this happens, press the [MENU] button again for 2 seconds to clear  
the camera menu.  
1. Press one of the <CAM1> to <CAM4> button to select the  
unit.  
Then start again from step 1.  
2. Release the limiters by taking the steps below.  
2. Press the [4], [5], [b] or [a] button for 2 seconds while  
holding down the [PRESET] button.  
Releasing the upper limit position of the movement range  
Perform the steps in “Basic limiter operations”.  
The limiter for the upper limit, lower limit, left limit or right limit is set  
(or released) using these direction buttons, respectively. The tally  
lamp will blink at this time. When a limiter is set, it blinks once; when a  
limiter is released, it blinks twice.  
(Press the [MENU] button quickly and then press the [4] button  
for 2 seconds while holding down the [PRESET] button.)  
If any other button was operated between steps 1 and 2, start again  
from step 1.  
Releasing the lower limit position of the movement range  
Perform the steps in “Basic limiter operations”.  
(Press the [MENU] button quickly and then press the [5] button  
for 2 seconds while holding down the [PRESET] button.)  
Setting the limiters  
Releasing the left-most limit position of the movement range  
Perform the steps in “Basic limiter operations”.  
The limiter positions can be set by following the steps below.  
When the position is set, the tally lamp blinks once.  
(Press the [MENU] button quickly and then press the [b] button  
for 2 seconds while holding down the [PRESET] button.)  
1. Press one of the <CAM1> to <CAM4> button to select the  
unit.  
Releasing the right-most limit position of the movement range  
Perform the steps in “Basic limiter operations”.  
Setting the upper limit position of the movement range  
Press the [4] or [5] button of the wireless remote control to turn  
the unit as far as the position which will serve as the upper limit.  
Next, perform the steps in “Basic limiter operations”.  
(Press the [MENU] button quickly and then press the [a] button  
for 2 seconds while holding down the [PRESET] button.)  
Resetting the limiters  
(Press the [MENU] button quickly and then press the [4] button  
for 2 seconds while holding down the [PRESET] button.)  
To reset the limiters, the currently established settings must be released.  
The limiter positions that are set can be reset by following the steps  
below.  
Setting the lower limit position of the movement range  
Press the [4] or [5] button of the wireless remote control to turn  
the unit as far as the position which will serve as the lower limit.  
Next, perform the steps in “Basic limiter operations”.  
1. Release the settings of the limiter positions to be reset  
by following the steps in “Releasing the limiters”.  
(Press the [MENU] button quickly and then press the [5] button  
for 2 seconds while holding down the [PRESET] button.)  
2. Set the limiter positions by following the steps in  
“Setting the limiters”.  
Setting the left-most limit position of the movement range  
Press the [b] or [a] button of the wireless remote control to turn  
the unit as far as the position which will serve as the left-most  
limit.  
Next, perform the steps in “Basic limiter operations”.  
(Press the [MENU] button quickly and then press the [b] button  
for 2 seconds while holding down the [PRESET] button.)  
Setting the right-most limit position of the movement range  
Press the [b] or [a] button of the wireless remote control to turn  
the unit as far as the position which will serve as the right-most  
limit.  
Next, perform the steps in “Basic limiter operations”.  
(Press the [MENU] button quickly and then press the [a] button  
for 2 seconds while holding down the [PRESET] button.)  
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Safe mode  
Concerning the safe mode  
The unit goes into the safe mode when the pan-tilt head is forcibly  
moved by an external force or when something impedes its rotation.  
Once the safe mode has been established, some or all of the operations  
will no longer be acknowledged to ensure safety and prevent equipment  
damage.  
Detection of equipment trouble  
When the unit has detected trouble, its functions are shut down, then  
the unit is restarted or the initial setting operation is performed, and the  
normal condition of the unit is restored after about 30 seconds.  
<NOTE>  
• When trouble is detected, pictures may no longer be output for a while,  
but they will be restored in 5 seconds to 10 seconds.  
112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Notes on for using Windows 7  
The symptoms described in this section may occur when using Microsoft  
Microsoft Windows 7. If a symptom occurs, follow the instructions of the  
corresponding solution.  
This section describes solutions to be performed using administrator  
accounts.  
Precautions when using Windows 7  
Symptom 1  
• The screen layout is abnormal, portions of the screens do not appear  
when running Compatibility View, or pop-up screens concerning the  
inability to redisplay screens appear.  
• Install the plug-in viewer software if necessary.  
For details on installation, refer to the supplied operating instructions.  
• The contents of this section are based on the results of operation  
confirmation tests performed by Panasonic.  
The symptoms may vary depending on your computer’s environment,  
the OS update version, etc.  
z Solution  
Enable [Display all websites in Compatibility View] in [Compatibility  
View Settings].  
1. Start Internet Explorer, and click [Tools],  
2. Click “Compatibility View Settings”.  
Computer requirements  
For details on the computer specification requirements, refer to the  
system requirements section in the operating instructions supplied with  
your computer.  
3. Select the [Display all websites in Compatibility View] checkbox,  
and click [Close].  
If the operating instructions do not include information on Windows 7,  
refer to the following.  
CPU  
Intel Core™ 2 DUO 2.4 GHz or more  
Memory  
1 GB or more  
(2 GB or more for 64-bit edition)  
Network function 10BASE-T or 100BASE-TX port × 1  
1 port  
Image display  
Resolution: 1024 × 768 pixels or more  
Color generation: True Color 24-bit or more  
Supported  
operating systems SP1 64-bit / 32-bit  
and  
Microsoft Windows 7 Professional  
1
*
Windows Internet Explorer 11.0 / 10.0 /  
Symptom 2  
2
9.0 / 8.0  
*
web browsers  
• The network connection is severed when the computer enters sleep  
mode.  
1 Windows XP compatibility mode is not supported.  
2 The 64-bit version of Internet Explorer is not supported.  
*
*
z Solution  
Reload the screen if necessary after exiting sleep mode.  
Symptom 3  
• The [Program Compatibility Assistant] screen appears after quitting the  
Easy IP Setup Software.  
z Solution  
This occurs only when using the Easy IP Setup Software for the first  
time.  
Select [This program installed correctly] in the [Program Compatibility  
Assistant] screen.  
z Restrictions  
• Setting items and values may not be displayed in the proper  
positions in some of the product setting screens.  
• It may be possible to display two web browser screens at the same  
time for some products.  
113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
Operation  
Symptom  
Cause and solution  
Reference pages  
• Is the AC adaptor securely connected to the AC outlet?  
– – –  
• If the power plug of the AC adaptor connected properly?  
– – –  
• Is the LAN cable connected securely to the IP control LAN connector (<LAN ACT/  
LINK>)?  
P. @@  
• Is the network cable for the PoE+ (IEEE802.at) compatible power supply device  
and the unit connected properly?  
P. @@  
P. @@  
No power  
• Power may not be supplied if the total power limit is exceeded on power supply  
devices that allow connections to multiple PoE+ terminals.  
Refer to the operating instructions for the PoE+ power supply device.  
• If the unit is connected to the controller, has it been connected properly?  
Refer to the operating instructions for the controller.  
P.@@ to P.@@  
– – –  
When performing operations from a wireless remote control  
Also refer to the “Cannot operate using the wireless remote control” item.  
• Is the power on?  
If the unit’s status display lamp is off or lights up orange, it means that the unit’s  
power is not on.  
P. <?>  
Cannot operate  
• The safe mode function may have been activated.  
• Have the limiter functions been set?  
P. @@  
P.@@ to P.@@  
P. <?>  
(common to wireless remote control,  
controller)  
• Has the unit you want to operate been selected properly?  
• Have the remote control’s batteries run down or have the batteries been installed  
with their polarities reversed?  
If the status display lamp does not blink even when the wireless remote control is  
operated near the wireless remote control signal light-sensing area, it means that  
the batteries have run down. Replace the batteries.  
– – –  
Cannot operate using the wireless  
remote control  
• Have the IR ID switches been set correctly?  
P.<?>, P.<?>  
P. <?>  
Is there a fluorescent light or plasma monitor near the unit and, if so, is the  
wireless remote control signal light-sensing area exposed to its light?  
• Is the unit connected to the controller properly?  
P.@@ to P.@@  
P.@@, P.@@  
Refer to the operating instructions for the controller.  
• The user authorization and host authorization must be set to OFF when the AW-  
RP120, AW-RP50 and AK-HRP200 remote camera controllers are connected in a  
network.  
Cannot operate using the controller  
• It may be necessary to upgrade the version of the controller so that the controller  
will support the unit.  
– – –  
P.@@, P.@@  
– – –  
Consult with your dealer.  
• Has the stand-alone (Desktop) installation setting been selected correctly?  
The unit turns in the opposite  
direction to the one operated  
• The reversal setting may have been established at the controller if the unit is  
connected to the controller.  
Refer to the operating instructions for the controller.  
114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting (continued)  
Symptom  
Cause and solution  
Reference pages  
• Has a LAN cable of category 5 or above been connected to the LAN connector  
for IP control <LINK/ACT>?  
P.@@ to P.@@  
• Is the <LINK> LED of the LAN connector for IP control <LINK/ACT> lit?  
If it is not lit, it means that something is wrong with the connection to the LAN or  
that the network at the connection destination is not working properly.  
Check the LAN cable for defective contacts, and check the wiring.  
P.@@ to P.@@  
• Is the power on?  
If the unit’s status display lamp is off or lights up orange, it means that the unit’s  
power is not on.  
P. @@  
• Has a valid IP address been set in the unit?  
• Has the wrong IP address been accessed?  
P.@@ to P.@@  
The web setting screen cannot be  
accessed  
Check the connections by following the steps below.  
Using the Windows command prompt: > ping [IP address which has been set in  
the camera] A reply returned from the unit signifies that there are no problems in  
operation.  
– – –  
If a reply is not received, try following operation:  
• Reboot the unit, and within 20 minutes change the IP address using the Easy IP  
Setup Software.  
• Has 554 been set as the HTTP port number?  
Use any port number, except for the numbers below which are used by the unit, for  
the HTTP port number.  
P. @@  
20, 21, 23, 25, 42, 53, 67, 68, 69, 110, 123, 161, 162, 554, 995, 10669, 10670,  
59000 to 59999, 60000 to 61000  
• Has the same IP address setting been used for another device?  
Is there a lack of consistency between the address set and the network subnet at  
the installation destination?  
→ [When the personal computer is connected to the unit within the same  
subnet]  
– – –  
Have the IP addresses of the unit and personal computer been set to the subnet  
shared by the unit and computer? Has the “Use proxy server” setting been selected  
by the web browser?  
The web setting screen cannot be  
accessed  
When accessing the unit within the same subnet, it is recommended that the unit’s  
address be set to the “Remove from proxy” address.  
→ [When the unit and personal computer are connected to different subnets]  
P. @@  
– – –  
Has the wrong setting been selected as the default gateway setting for the unit?  
For Windows:  
• Press the [F5] key on the keyboard of the personal computer to request that the  
settings be acquired.  
For Mac:  
• Press the [Command] + [R] key on the computer's keyboard to request that the  
settings be acquired.  
• Perform the following to delete the temporary Internet files.  
For Windows:  
A
B
C
Select [Tools] - [Internet Options] in Internet Explorer.  
Click the [General] tab, and click the [Delete] button under [Browsing history].  
In the [Delete Browsing History] screen, select the [Temporary Internet Files]  
checkbox, and then click [Delete].  
– – –  
D
Click the [OK] button.  
For Mac:  
The settings on the web setting  
screen are not updated or displayed  
properly  
A
Select [Safari] - [Empty Cache] in Safari.  
Click [Empty] in the [Are you sure you want to empty the cache?] pop-up screen.  
B
For Windows:  
• If [Check for newer versions of stored pages] is not set to [Every time I visit the  
webpage] in the temporary Internet file settings, IP images may not appear in the  
web setting screen.  
→ Perform the following.  
A
B
C
Select [Tools] - [Internet Options] in Internet Explorer.  
Click the [General] tab, and click the [Settings] button under [Browsing history].  
In the [Temporary Internet Files and History Settings] dialog box, select the  
[Every time I visit the webpage] option under [Check for newer versions of  
stored pages].  
– – –  
D
Click the [OK] button.  
• The unit’s ports may be filtered by the firewall or other function of the anti-virus  
software.  
– – –  
→ Change the HTTP port number of the unit to a port number that will not be filtered.  
115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting (continued)  
Symptom  
Cause and solution  
Reference pages  
For Windows:  
• Has the file download function been disabled?  
→ Perform the following.  
A
Select [Tools] - [Internet Options] in Internet Explorer.  
Click the [Security] tab, and click the [Custom level] button under [Security level  
for this zone].  
B
It is not possible to download the  
setting files  
– – –  
C
D
In the [Security Settings] dialog box, select the [Enable] option for [File  
download].  
For Internet Explorer 8 only:  
Select the [Enable] option for [Automatic prompting for the file downloads].  
Click the [OK] button.  
Click the [OK] button.  
E
F
116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting (continued)  
Video  
Symptom  
Cause and solution  
Reference pages  
• Has the unit been connected properly to the other connected devices?  
P.@@ to P.@@  
• If the system is configured in such a way that the picture is also switched when  
the unit to be operated is selected, has the correct unit been selected?  
P. <?>  
P.@@, P.@@  
P. <?>  
No pictures are displayed or the  
pictures are disturbed  
• Has the image signal setting been selected correctly?  
• Are external sync signals that are supported by the video signal format which  
has been set being input?  
The picture is flipped vertically  
• Has the stand-alone (Desktop) installation setting been selected correctly?  
• Switch to the camera picture.  
P.@@, P.@@  
P. <?>  
Multiple color bands (color bars) are  
displayed  
The menu screen is displayed  
• Exit the camera menu.  
P.@@ to P.@@  
• Depending on the HDMI monitor you are using, you may experience one or more  
of the symptoms described below. These symptoms are especially noticeable  
when any of the SD formats is used: This is normal and not indicative of any  
trouble.  
It is difficult to view the menu  
screens  
• The resolution of the characters in the camera menu displays changes as the  
background image changes.  
– – –  
• Depending on the edge enhancement setting established for the monitor, white lines  
appear in front of the black shadows of the camera menus.  
• Depending on the edge enhancement setting established for the monitor, the  
background colors may be superimposed onto the white parts of the camera menus.  
• Is the focus set to manual?  
P. <?>  
P. <?>  
Auto focusing is initiated as soon as the focus is set to auto.  
No auto focusing  
• In some situations, it may be hard to focus at the auto setting.  
In cases like this, select the manual setting, and focus manually.  
• Was the focus adjusted at the Tele end?  
First adjust the focus at the Tele end where the focusing accuracy is higher, and  
then proceed with the zooming.  
– – –  
The subject is not brought into focus  
during zooming when the manual  
setting is used for the focus  
• Under some operating conditions, it may be hard to bring subjects into focus.  
In such cases, use the focus at the auto setting.  
P. <?>  
• Are you shooting with visible light?  
→ The focus position is different due to the difference in refractive index between  
visible light and infrared light. Wavelengths near 900 mm are assumed for infrared  
light in night mode on this unit.  
Focusing is not possible in night  
mode  
P. @@  
Perform manual adjustment if necessary.  
• Is the format set to 59.94p?  
→ Configure the format setting.  
1080/59.94p images are not output  
P. @@  
P. @@  
1080/29.97p(25p) images are not  
output  
• Is the monitoring mode set to VIDEO OUT mode?  
Set the monitoring mode to IP mode.  
• This is normal operation.  
→ In the PsF (Progressive segmented Frame) format, an identical image is captured  
to fields 1 and 2 in order to output the same image as progressive. Therefore, the  
image will appear slightly jerky.  
1080/29.97PsF images appear jerky  
– – –  
• Activate the ATW (Auto tracking white adjustment) function.  
P.<?>  
Something is wrong with the  
coloring of the pictures  
• In some situations, the proper colors may not be reproduced using the ATW  
function.  
P.@@ to P.@@  
In cases like this, proceed with the white balance adjustment.  
117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting (continued)  
Symptom  
Cause and solution  
Reference pages  
• Either select the auto setting for the iris or select the manual setting and adjust  
the iris manually.  
P. @@  
The pictures are too light or too dark  
• The pictures may be dark if the analog video signal cables are too long because  
this will cause signal attenuation.  
– – –  
• Is the unit in night mode?  
→ In night mode, output will be in black and white.  
Images are in black and white  
P. @@  
P. @@  
Auto white balance adjustment  
(AWB) is not possible  
• Is the unit in night mode?  
→ Auto white balance adjustment (AWB) is not possible in night mode.  
The screen is too bright in night  
mode  
• The aperture is set to open in night mode to prevent video voyeurism. Adjust the  
brightness at the light source.  
P. @@  
The iris does not operate in night  
mode.  
• Since this camera uses an MOS image device, the shooting timing differs slightly  
at the top left and bottom right of the screen. This means that if a subject has  
moved quickly across in front of the camera, it may appear slightly distorted.  
This is normal and not indicative of any problem.  
The subjects appear distorted  
– – –  
• With a MOS image sensor, the shooting timing differs slightly between the top  
left and bottom right of the screen. This means that when the flash is fired, the  
bottom of the screen will become lighter in the field concerned and the top will  
become lighter in the next field.  
When the flash is fired during  
shooting, only the top or bottom of  
the screen becomes lighter  
– – –  
This is normal and not indicative of any problem.  
• These phenomena (flicker) may occur under the illumination produced by  
fluorescent lighting, mercury bulbs or other types of discharge tubes. In such  
cases, we recommend setting the electronic shutter speed to 1/100 in regions  
with 50 Hz power supply frequency, and to OFF in regions with 60 Hz power  
supply frequency.  
The brightness changes cyclically  
or the colors change, and horizontal  
stripes can be seen passing across  
the screen  
– – –  
• This phenomenon occurs because the pixels are arranged systematically on  
each image sensor. It is noticeable when the spatial frequency of a subject and  
the pixel pitch are brought into proximity so change the camera angle or take  
other such action.  
When fine lines or cyclical patterns  
are shot, flickering is seen or  
coloring is added to them  
– – –  
• The following causes are possible.  
- The camera, switching hub, or peripheral devices are not grounded.  
- Power lines are running nearby.  
- Equipment generating strong electric or magnetic fields (e.g., television and radio  
antennas, air conditioning motors, power transformers) are located nearby.  
If the problem cannot be resolved via movement of surrounding devices, use a  
microphone equipped with an amplifier, or connect an audio output with low output  
impedance.  
Noise occurs in the audio input  
P. @@  
118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting (continued)  
IP images  
Symptom  
Cause and solution  
Reference pages  
For Windows:  
• Is the plug-in viewer software installed.  
P. @@  
→ Install the plug-in viewer software.  
For Windows:  
• Is the version of DirectX 9.0c or later?  
→ Check the version of DirectX as follows.  
A
Select [Run] in the start menu of the computer.  
Enter "dxdiag", and click the [OK] button.  
– – –  
B
If the version of DirectX is earlier than 9.0c, acquire the latest version from the  
Microsoft website.  
Images are not displayed  
For Windows:  
• If [Check for newer versions of stored pages] is not set to [Every time I visit the  
webpage] in the temporary Internet file settings, IP images may not appear in the  
Live screen.  
Perform the following.  
A
B
C
Select [Tools] - [Internet Options] in Internet Explorer.  
Click the [General] tab, and click the [Settings] button under [Browsing history].  
In the [Temporary Internet Files and History Settings] dialog box, select the  
[Every time I visit the webpage] option under [Check for newer versions of  
stored pages].  
– – –  
D
Click the [OK] button.  
• Is the focus properly adjusted?  
→ Check the focus adjustment.  
The images are blurry  
– – –  
• The images may not be updated and other problems may occur depending on  
your browser and its version.  
• The images may stop depending on the network congestion, the level of access  
to the unit. etc.  
• If the IP video settings of the unit were changed, the image display may stop  
temporarily.  
→ Check the level of access to the unit, including the multi screen display, and stop  
any unnecessary access.  
Afterward, check the following.  
For Windows:  
Images are not updated  
– – –  
Press the [F5] key on the computer's keyboard to request that the settings be  
acquired.  
For Mac OS X:  
Press the [Command] + [R] key on the computer's keyboard to request that the  
settings be acquired.  
For mobile terminals:  
Refresh the screen by pressing the [Refresh] button on the web browser, for  
example, to request that the settings be acquired.  
• Perform the following to delete the temporary Internet files.  
For Windows:  
A
B
C
Select [Tools] - [Internet Options] in Internet Explorer.  
Click the [General] tab, and click the [Delete] button under [Browsing history].  
In the [Delete Browsing History] screen, select the [Temporary Internet Files]  
checkbox, and then click [Delete].  
– – –  
D
Click the [OK] button.  
For Mac OS X:  
A
Select [Safari] - [Empty Cache] in Safari.  
B
Click [Empty] in the [Are you sure you want to empty the cache?] pop-up screen.  
The images do not update or display  
properly  
• Reconfigure Wi-Fi settings as follows.  
For mobile terminals (iOS):  
Execute [Reset Network Settings] in [Settings] icon - [General] - [Reset], and configure  
new Wi-Fi settings.  
– – –  
– – –  
• The unit’s ports may be filtered by the firewall or other function of the anti-virus  
software.  
→ Change the HTTP port number of the unit to a port number that will not be filtered.  
119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting (continued)  
Symptom  
Cause and solution  
Reference pages  
• If the “Network Camera View 4S” plug-in viewer software is deleted in an  
environment where the “Network Camera View 3” plug-in viewer software is  
installed, display of H.264 images will become impossible.  
In such cases, delete “Network Camera View 3” before installing “Network  
Camera View 4S”.  
– – –  
H.264 images are not displayed  
• Is the camera connected to the computer via the Internet?  
→ Set [Internet Mode] to [On].  
P. @@  
– – –  
• The images may be distorted if the transmission path is congested and proper  
transmission is not possible.  
→ Consult your network administrator.  
The images are distorted  
• The images may be distorted if video packet shuffling occurs on the  
transmission path.  
– – –  
– – –  
→ Switching to an identical Internet service provider for both the camera and the  
computer may prevent this problem. → Consult your network administrator.  
The images darken when the mobile  
terminal is not operated for a certain  
period  
• Is the power-saving mode of the mobile terminal enabled?  
→ Disable the power-saving mode of the mobile terminal to allow the images to be  
displayed indefinitely.  
• Is the [Tally] setting set to [Disable]?  
The tally lamps do not light  
If [Tally] is set to [Disable], the unit's tally lamp does not light. Change the setting to  
[Enable].  
– – –  
Commands from the remote  
controller are unstable  
• Are two or more Android terminals connected?  
Only one Android terminal can be connected to the unit.  
P. @@  
For Windows:  
• This may occur depending on the combination of the computer's display adapter  
and the driver.  
If this occurs, update the first display adapter to the latest version.  
If this does not resolve the problem, adjust the hardware accelerator functon as  
follows.  
Example: Windows XP  
ARight-click on the desktop, and select [Properties] from the menu.  
BClick the [Settings] tab in the display properties screen, and click the [Advanced]  
button.  
CClick the [Troubleshoot] tab, and adjust the [Hardware acceleration] performance  
level to [None].  
When multiple web browsers are  
running to display H.264 images,  
images from multiple cameras  
appear sequentially in a single web  
browser.  
– – –  
120  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting (continued)  
Web settings  
Depending on the OS installed on the personal computer, the following  
may occur. Follow the instructions below when the following has  
occurred. By performing the following solutions, other applications and  
the security level may not be affected.  
The “Information bar” expressed in the following symptom and solutions  
will be displayed just below the address bar only when there is  
information to communicate.  
Symptom  
Cause and solution  
Reference pages  
The following message is displayed  
on the information bar.  
“Pop-up blocked. To see this pop-up  
or additional options click here...”  
• Click the information bar and select “Always Allow Pop-ups from This Site”. The  
dialog window saying “Allow pop-ups from this site?” will be displayed. Click the  
[Yes] button.  
– – –  
• Click “Internet Options” under “Tools” of the menu bar of Internet Explorer®,  
and then click the [Security] tab.  
An unnecessary status bar or scroll  
bar is displayed on the pop-up  
window  
Click “Internet” in the “Select a Web content zone to specify its security  
settings:” section. Then, click the [Custom Level...] button to open the “Security  
Setting” window. Under “Miscellaneous”, select “Enable” for “Allow script-  
initiated windows without size or position constraints”. Click the [OK] button.  
When the warning window is displayed, click the [Yes] button.  
– – –  
121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
FUNCTIONS AND PERFORMANCE  
Power requirements: DC 12 V (AC adaptor supplied)  
DC 42 - 57 V (PoE+ power supply)  
[Camera unit]  
Current consumption: 1.8 A (AC adaptor supplied)  
0.6 A (PoE+ power supply)  
Imaging sensors: 1/2.86-type Full-HD 3MOS  
Lens:  
Motorized 20 zoom, F1.6 to F3.4  
(f=4.5 mm to 90 mm; 35 mm equivalent: 32.13 mm  
to 642.5 mm)  
indicates safety information.  
GENERAL  
Focus:  
Switching between auto and manual  
Ambient operating temperature:  
0 °C to 40 °C  
Focus distance: Entire zooming range: 800 mm (2.62 ft)  
Wide end: 400 mm (1.31 ft)  
Storage temperature:  
–20 °C to 50 °C  
Color separation optical system:  
3MOS  
Allowable humidity ranges:  
20 % to 90 % (no condensation)  
Minimum illumination:  
2 lx(50 %, F1.6, 36 dB)  
Mass:  
Approx. 3.0 kg (6.61 lb) [Including mount bracket]  
Horizontal resolution:  
Dimensions (W x H x D):  
180 mm × 228 mm × 234 mm  
1000 TV lines Typ (Center area)  
(excluding protrusions, cable cover, direct ceiling  
mount bracket)  
Gain selection: Auto, 0 dB to 36 dB  
Frame mix:  
0 dB, 6 dB, 12 dB, 18 dB, 24 dB  
Finish:  
AW-HE120W: Pearl white  
AW-HE120K: Metallic black  
• This cannot be configured when the format is  
1080/29.97p, 1080/23.98p, 1080/29.97PsF,  
1080/23.98PsF, 1080/25p, or 1080/25PsF.  
Controller supported:  
AW-RP120, AW-RP50, AK-HRP200  
Electronic shutter speed:  
• 59.94p/59.94i:  
• It may be necessary to upgrade the version of the  
controller in order to support the unit.  
1/100, 1/120, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000,  
1/4000, 1/10000  
INPUT  
• 29.97p:  
Input connector: DC 12 V IN,  
1/30, 1/60, 1/120, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000,  
G/L IN (BNC)  
1/4000, 1/10000  
• BBS (Black Burst Sync), tri-level sync supported  
• 23.98p:  
• Locking to a color subcarrier is not possible with  
BBS.  
1/24, 1/60, 1/120, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000,  
1/4000, 1/10000  
PoE+ (IEEE802.3at standard)  
• 50p/50i:  
1/60, 1/120, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000, 1/4000,  
1/10000  
• 25p:  
OUTPUT  
Video output  
1/25, 1/60, 1/120, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000,  
1/4000, 1/10000  
HDMI:  
HDMI connector  
• HDCP is not supported.  
• Viera Link is not supported.  
Synchro scan:  
• 59.94 Hz:  
60.15 Hz to 642.21 Hz  
• 50 Hz:  
50.15 Hz to 535.71 Hz  
HD/SD SDI OUT: SMPTE424/SMPTE292/SMPTE259 standards  
75 Ω(BNC×1)  
VIDEO OUT:  
NTSC/PAL  
1.0 V [p-p]/75 Ω (BNC×1)  
Gamma:  
HD, SD, FILMLIKE1, FILMLIKE2, FILMLIKE3  
0.30 to 0.75 (Manual setting)  
White balance: AWB A, AWB B, ATW, 3200K, 5600K, VAR (2000K  
INPUT/OUTPUT  
to 15000K)  
Input/Output connector  
Chroma amount variability:  
LAN:  
LAN connector for IP control (RJ-45)  
CONTROL IN RS-422A (RJ-45)  
OFF, -99 % to 40 %  
RS-422:  
Scene file:  
Scene1, Scene2, Scene3, Scene4  
MIC/LINE input: φ3.5 mm stereo mini jack  
Input impedance: Approx. 2 kΩ unbalanced  
Output format:  
1080/59.94p, 1080/29.97p, 1080/23.98p,  
1080/59.94i, 1080/29.97PsF, 1080/23.98PsF,  
• During MIC input  
Supported mic:  
• Supply voltage:  
Mic input sensitivity: -40 dB ± 3 dB  
(0 dB=1 V/Pa, 1 kHz)  
• During LINE input  
Input level:  
720/59.94p, 480/59.94p(i) 1, 1080/50p, 1080/25p,  
*
Plug-in-power  
2.5 V ± 0.5 V  
1
1080/50i, 1080/25PsF, 720/50p, 576/50p(i)  
*
1 A ‘P’ signal is output as HDMI output, an ‘I’  
*
signal is output as SDI and an analog output for  
output formats of 1080/59.94p(i), 1080/50p(i),  
480/59.94p(i) and 576/50p(i).  
Approx. -10 dBV  
Synchronization system:  
Internal/External synchronization (BBS/Tri-level sync)  
122  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications (continued)  
[Pan-tilt head unit]  
Installation method:  
Stand-alone (Desktop) or suspended (Hanging)  
• To ensure safety, the unit must be secured using  
the mount bracket supplied.  
Camera/pan-tilt head control:  
IP connecting  
cable  
• When connecting through a hub: LAN  
cable 2 (category 5e or above, straight  
*
cable), max. 100 m (328 ft)  
• When a hub is not used: LAN cable  
(category 5 or above, crossover cable) max.  
100 m (328 ft)  
2
*
RP connecting  
cable  
LAN cable 2 (category 5 or above, straight  
cable), max. 1000 m [3280 ft]  
RS-422A, AW series protocol  
*
2
Use of an STP (shielded twisted pair) cable is recommended.  
*
Pan/tilt operation speed:  
Max. 60°/s  
Panning range  
:
±175°  
Tilting range  
:
–30° to 210°  
• Depending on the pan or tilt position, the camera  
may be reflected in the image.  
Quietness:  
NC35  
AC adaptor  
Input :AC 100 to 240 V, 1.2 A  
50 to 60Hz  
Output :DC 12 V, 2.0 A, 24 W  
indicates safety information.  
The rating of the supplied AC cord is 125 V or less.  
Connect it to a 100 V AC outlet.  
123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
124  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MEMO  
125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Information on Disposal for Users of Waste Electrical & Electronic Equipment (private households)  
This symbol on the products and/or accompanying documents means that used electrical and electronic products  
should not be mixed with general household waste.  
For proper treatment, recovery and recycling, please take these products to designated collection points,  
where they will be accepted on a free of charge basis. Alternatively, in some countries you may be able to return  
your products to your local retailer upon the purchase of an equivalent new product.  
Disposing of this product correctly will help to save valuable resources and prevent any potential negative effects  
on human health and the environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling.  
Please contact your local authority for further details of your nearest designated collection point.  
Penalties may be applicable for incorrect disposal of this waste, in accordance with national legislation.  
For business users in the European Union  
If you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment, please contact your dealer or supplier for further information.  
Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union  
This symbol is only valid in the European Union.  
If you wish to discard this product, please contact your local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of  
disposal.  
Web Site: http://panasonic.net  
©Panasonic Corporation 2014  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Mr Coffee Espresso Maker ECM20 User Manual
MTD Cultivator 21A 120R000 User Manual
Multiquip Riding Toy HTX 44K4 User Manual
Nespresso Espresso Maker 3035 User Manual
Oki All in One Printer 510W User Manual
Oki Printer 1624N User Manual
Olympus Camcorder TG 320 User Manual
Optimus Cassette Player SCP 87 User Manual
Panasonic Answering Machine KX TG1855 User Manual
Panasonic Cordless Telephone KX TG6511 User Manual